JP6771838B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, as one of the game machines, when the main digital becomes a specific mode, it becomes a big hit, and it is useful by winning a prize in a game machine (type 1 pachinko machine) in which an attacker opens and a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and an opening passage port. Pachinko, a type 1 and type 2 multifunction device that mixes the two elements of a game machine (formerly type 2 pachinko machine) that allows a large number of prize balls to be obtained when a game ball passes through a predetermined area due to the opening of an object. The machine is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014442

However, since the above-mentioned gaming machines are not new, it is becoming difficult to satisfy players who seek further gaming interests.

Therefore, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest in gaming by solving such conventional problems.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means capable of launching a game medium in the gaming area, a pre-determination means for performing a lottery regarding the game when the start condition of the fluctuation is satisfied, and the pre-determination. When it is determined by the lottery of the means that it is a special result that can give a profit, the opening / closing member is opened based on the fact that the fluctuation performed by the fluctuation display unit provided outside the effect display device is stopped. An opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the opening / closing member so that the game medium can enter the specific winning opening where the game medium can enter, and a position where the game medium having entered the specific winning opening can pass are provided. A movable member control means for controlling the movement of the receiving movable member and the receiving movable member for the predetermined period so that the game medium can pass through a specific area in which the game medium is restricted from passing by the receiving movable member. When the game medium can pass through the specific area due to the movement, the advantageous benefit giving means that gives an advantageous benefit different from the benefit given by the special result, and the advantageous benefit giving means that is determined to be the special result and that gives the advantageous benefit. the triggered by the advantageous benefit is granted, a high gaming state control means game medium to the particular winning hole than gaming normal conditions are controlled with high playing state easily enter the lottery by the pre-determination means The result is the special result that allows the game medium to enter the specific winning opening, to the notification means that can be notified by the display effect in the effect display device, and to the specific area whose passage is restricted by the accepting movable member. By moving the receiving movable member for a predetermined period so that the game medium that has entered the specific winning opening can pass through, the game state is controlled so that the game medium can easily enter the specific winning opening than in the normal gaming state. The specific display effect by the high game notification means is provided with a high game notification means that enables the player to recognize the fact by executing a specific display effect different from the notification means on the effect display device. By moving the receiving movable member for a predetermined period so that the game medium can pass through the specific area, the game state is controlled so that the game medium can easily enter the specific winning opening as compared with the normal game state. Before the fluctuations performed by the fluctuation display unit provided outside the effect display device are stopped, and the result of the lottery by the pre-determination means by the notification means, the game medium is placed in the specific winning opening. It is executed before the display effect notifies that it is the special result that allows entry, and the identification is performed. The effect executed in the display effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the effect image displayed in the display area to a specific display mode, and in the gaming state after the jackpot satisfying a predetermined condition is completed , the specific effect is described. The display effect can be executed by the high game notification means, and the specific display effect is the effect in response to the start of the variation performed by the variation display unit provided outside the effect display device. Among the periods until the variation of the decorative symbol started by the display device is completed, the specific display effect is executed only for a temporary period so that the player can recognize that the specific display effect is being executed. ..

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest by realizing a novel game property.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a door frame seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the rear. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. It is sectional drawing of the left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at afterwards. It is sectional drawing which cut at the part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows with the front cover of a foul cover unit removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of the ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit removed from the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front, and (D). Is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which shows by cutting the door frame substantially in the center in the vertical direction. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is a left side view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at afterwards. It is a perspective view explaining the operation of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover and looked at from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a front view which shows the main part of the game board enlarged. It is a perspective view of the winning opening unit in a game board as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the winning opening unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the winning opening unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the winning opening unit for each main structure and looked at later. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of a winning opening unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the attacker unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the variable start opening unit of a winning opening unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the variable start port unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the variable start port unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the variable start port unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the start | door member of the variable start port unit retracted from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the start | door member of the variable start port unit moved forward from the upper side. (A) is a perspective view of the accessory unit of the winning opening unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the accessory unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a front view of the accessory unit, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the accessory winning opening unit of the accessory unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the accessory winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the V winning opening unit of the accessory unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the V winning opening unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the receiving portion of the rotating body of the V winning opening unit faces the receiving side from the front side, and (b) shows a state in which the receiving portion of the rotating body faces the V winning opening side. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball on the right side in the game board. (A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball with the start door member retracted in the variable start port unit from the front side, and (b) is an explanatory view of the game ball with the start door member advanced with the start port door member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow from the front side. (A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball in the variable start door unit in the state where the start door member is retracted from the left front, and (b) is the explanatory view of the game ball in the state where the start door member is in the forward position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow from the left front, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the start opening door member is retracting from the left front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball from the front side when the accessory winning opening can be accepted in the accessory unit, and (b) is an explanatory view in which the receiving portion of the rotating body is the V winning opening in the V winning opening unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when facing the side from the front side. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the determination result of the special symbol. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 1st start port detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2nd start port detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special symbol processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation pattern setting process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary symbol processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start door door processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the open rotation control processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the open rotation control processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening opening control process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game state setting process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect control processing of a peripheral control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect control processing of a peripheral control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect control processing of a peripheral control board.

(First Embodiment of the present invention)
[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball T (see FIGS. 122, 123, etc.) as a game medium is driven, and a main body. A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close the front surface of the frame 3 and the game board 4 from the player side is provided. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball T arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It is provided with a dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5. ..

As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and each in the left-right direction. The width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 to open the door frame 2.

In the front view of the pachinko machine 1, a game area 1100 in which the game ball T is driven through the game window 101 having a substantially circular shape is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can handle the handle device 500 in a state where the game ball T is stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball T, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 98), various winning openings, and accessories in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the glass. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and the left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. A frame plate 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 are used to connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 respectively. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, and are vertically and vertically located substantially in the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engaging notch portion 15 is provided which penetrates the surface and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. It is provided with a protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction), and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 10). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the operator The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending vertically, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the opposite of the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. The lower support metal fitting 21 to be formed, the reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. It is provided with a decorative cover 23. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20 and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (FIG. 14 (A)). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 is configured to be able to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the lock member 27 can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, so that the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. The width of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d of the above is provided. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000, which are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20, and is attached to the support projecting piece 20b by the rivet 28. On the other hand, it is rotatably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The operating portion 27b that protrudes, the elastic piece 27c that protrudes from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. The head space portion of the above is not closed, and a space is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a A state in which the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, respectively. The centers are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 The moment to rotate the tip in the direction away from the support protrusion 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is attached to the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction away from the support protrusion 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the tip of the stopper 27a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengaging, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protrusion piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the lock member 27 is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed into the drawing. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c. Therefore, the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, so that the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material (aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment lined up in the amusement park, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to make the nails easier to drive, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left-right direction can be widened. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is the side frame plate 12 and 13. Since the connecting member 14 is fastened in close contact with the inner surface and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and the outer frame 2 is sturdy. It can be used as a rectangular framework. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, and then the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It includes a left side decorative unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decorative unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving the game ball T, and a door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear surface, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 closed to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 590 to be attached.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner circumference is formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both the lower left and right outer sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500 are provided.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 or the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when attaching or detaching the side speaker 130. It has become.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is formed so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 cover the lower part of the game window 101. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 1113, a handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and a launch cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. Door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192, etc. (on the right side (shaft support side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base. The door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the substrate 194, and the wiring cord 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of (see 28) is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the overall rigidity is increased by fixing the reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has enough strength to sufficiently support the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control board provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 1116 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 1116 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motors 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring code 196 that connects the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 1101, the peripheral control board 1116, etc. is on the right side (axis) of the door frame base board 194 when viewed from the rear. After being aggregated and bundled at the position of (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal plate It is designed to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 61).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape. The substantially elliptical game window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 has the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become like.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and a ball feed unit 580. The ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the game ball T that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are inserted into the ball feed unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying to the handle and a handle for attaching the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. The mounting portion 114, the wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. It is provided with a lock hole 116 formed in the above and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 when viewed from the rear. From the board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side), and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101, which is closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the security cover 180 and the door frame base main body 110 projecting rearward to mount the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101, and the glass unit 590. A glass unit support step 110a that can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the game, and two locking members that project rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 to rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190. The unit 110b is further provided.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. At the same time, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting portion 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 338 (see FIG. 18 and the like) at appropriate positions. It is formed.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g and the foul cover unit 540 in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300, which will be described later, A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the upper side of the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 on the front side thereof, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole is made from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 by a thin drill or the like. It can be prevented by the crime prevention member 121, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at the position of .5 m), so that the sound reaches the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction from the pachinko machine 1, so that the left and right side speakers 130 can be used. By outputting related different sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 can be attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and is formed on the rear surface on the rear side in the vertical direction. It is provided with a stepped portion 195a that is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the door. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , It is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the drawing, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in each of the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically attached to the step portion 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 can be formed. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

The wiring holding member 197 is bound to a predetermined binding hole 197a paired up and down with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction of closing the door frame 5, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotates in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively separated from each other. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the door frame base substrate cover 195 moves the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported so that the free end side moves toward the main body frame 3. Since the main body frame 3 is rotatably supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when opening and closing the door frame 5. It is possible to prevent problems (disconnection of wiring cord 196, disconnection of connection connector, etc.) from occurring due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts via the wiring cord 196 when opening and closing the door frame 5, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 makes a state in which a bridge is built between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as wiring and the door frame 5 from being unable to be closed, and the main control board 1113, peripheral control board 1116, payout control board 1101, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side. There is a problem with the wiring 196 that connects each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle device 500, etc. as electrical equipment. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the above as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connector. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-23675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and reliably prevent the wiring 196 from falling off from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, as described above, the wiring 196 is provided by the wiring holding member 197. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the door frame 5, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention against fraudulent activities can be used.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges protruding from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least toward the side along which the wiring 196 is aligned, wiring is performed by a pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround the three sides of the 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a ridge, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Therefore, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring 196 is extended. The predetermined position is the position on the axial center side of the door frame 5 with respect to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. Since a pantograph-shaped link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, and the opening / closing work can be facilitated. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compactly assembled, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring holding member 197 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compactly organized, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members to prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held with respect to the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base board cover 195 side). Therefore, the wiring from the door frame 5 is also possible. The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5 side for moving (opening / closing), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force for opening / closing the door frame 5, which is described above. It is possible to surely produce the desired action and effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 is provided. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size, and having a large game board 4 and strongly attracting the interest of the player. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the tubular portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. It is provided with 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality of directions in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the diagonally inclined handle mounting portion 114, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is mounted so as to extend toward the right side (open side) as it faces forward in the front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also in an obliquely inclined state.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed on the lower long side edge of the long side edge thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. A vertically bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction is provided at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction and It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 that substantially corresponds to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outer bent projecting piece 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open side inwardly bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inwardly bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open side outer bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearwardly to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side (FIG. FIG. 63). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long side.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action may be facilitated, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. , The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U shape (FIG. FIG. 63), it is possible to prevent the insertion of the tool, and it is possible to prevent only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a crime prevention rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, both the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are provided with security rear end projecting pieces 183 that project rearward along the shape of the ends. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security front projecting piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the security front projecting piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching it to the security cover attachment portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the security front projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer circumference of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and is also fitted. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component member 1110. As a result, even if an illegal tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

Since the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball striking guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball that flies or reverses the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

As a result, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the outer periphery of the lower rear side of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are displayed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between the doors, the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering and cheating. It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety against the above.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for locking the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In the glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

Further, the launch cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decorative unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms an outer surface of the right side decorative unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 that is arranged behind the side lens 210. The decorative substrate 214 on the right side, which is arranged from the substantially center to the upper side in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) mounted on the surface, and the side inner on the lower side. The rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and the right side upper decorative substrate 214 which are arranged from substantially the center to the lower side of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and have a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the side so as to cover the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a lens 210 and a decorative substrate cover 220 on the lower right side that is attached to the side decorative frame 202.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged with a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, in front of the side lens 210 and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and is an abbreviation for the game window 101. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are side inner lenses. It includes an inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to 212, and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the upper side inner lens 206.

In the right side decorative unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. The 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do this, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative board 214 and the lower right side decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control board 1116, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control board 1116. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has the right end and the upper end formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front, and the left end is the game window 101. It is formed in a curved shape along the outer circumference on the right side of the door. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a that are divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 210b made of the prism surface of the above. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend above the radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and are formed from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed in a state of being recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

Further, the side lens 210 is provided with a side diffusion lens portion 210c extending in the front-rear direction and arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusion lens portion 210c allows the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 to be widely diffused in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It is designed to be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 can diffusely refract and reflect light by the wrinkled portion and a plurality of small diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to make the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 glitter. At the same time, it is possible to make the perspective look unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. As the LEDs 214a and 216a, those having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A lens having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. The LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is a red and green LED in this example.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 is provided with a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and is provided on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the upper side inner lens 206, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to do. Similar to the side inner lens 212, the front side of the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed in a wrinkled shape, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a mountain portion protruding forward in the wrinkled portion. The wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses allow light to be diffusely refracted and diffusely reflected.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and arranged on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can produce a radial light emission effect by emitting light from the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the right side is the game window 101. Along with the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrically formed with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and the large window frames 242a having a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a which are continuously arranged on the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and a large one. It includes a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. The transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side with respect to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250. An inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and having a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. It is provided with a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of strip-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258, which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side, which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. It includes a left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is a transparent transparent unit 240 that supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view and the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252. A diffuser formed by a plurality of strip-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker bracket 264, inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 on the upper right side of the front view, and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. It includes an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the upper left side decorative substrate cover 258, and the lower left side decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the inner The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (silver in this example). Further, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, the small windows on both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed so as to penetrate to the side surfaces of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 to be closed, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through the 250a can be visually recognized from the player side. A diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. Light is diffusely refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and behind the side inner lens 252. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. are not clearly visible from the player side.

Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. In addition to being able to do so, the decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative board 254 and the lower left side decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control board 1116, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control board 1116. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example has a form extending in the vertical direction along the left outer circumference of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer circumference of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is made of synthetic resin. It is formed.

In the side lower decorative frame 242, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

Further, the side upper decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in front view, which is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer circumference to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the side open. The side upper decorative frame 244 is a substantially elliptical small window frame arranged between two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with 244b and an opening frame 244c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

In the side upper decorative frame 244, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. The 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. The 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and visible.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side of the center on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a shape in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 and the peripheral lens portion 250a are recessed to the rear side. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 250b formed on the front side and a side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radial lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged behind each peripheral lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decorative member 251 also has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer circumference of the game window 101 and concentrically centered on the center of the game window 101 in the width direction thereof. Multiple are provided. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into each inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner band-shaped lens is arranged in the extending direction on the front side. It intersects (substantially orthogonally) with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a of the decorative member 251.

In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a is visible from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. However, the light is diffusely refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a, so that the light is diffused. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the drawing, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

Further, the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on the surface, and the large side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are mounted. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) and are used on the side. The LEDs 254b, arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. As 256b, a lens having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in the front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent mischief from being mischievous by the upper left speaker 262 or breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262 and inserting an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player, and is less likely to cause noise than other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the surface of the side lens 250 having a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and is curved, and is arranged behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic glossy plating layer and having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. A side inner lens 252 having a diffuser portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses, a left side upper decorative substrate 254 and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a. And (see FIG. 33 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be light-emittingly decorated.

By the way, the light radiated to the front (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is radiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected from the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a toward the inner decorative member 251 is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. At (front surface), the light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side) is converged and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, and the peripheral lens portion 250a is provided with the direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and the peripheral surface. The indirect light reflected from the front surface of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the positions shifted from each other. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected in a striped manner with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the direction (approximately orthogonal). Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 extends in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a, which is longer than the width of the slit 251a, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminescent decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Top decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. As shown in FIG. 17, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5, and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extending frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extending frame 281c that extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decorative member 281. A transparent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a plate-shaped diffuser lens 285 arranged behind the upper central lens 284 and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. , An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffuser lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a cylinder that is arranged on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and has substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light-shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the tubular portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287 arranged behind the light-shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outside of the tubular portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged in the above are provided with an upper central decorative substrate 288 mounted on the front surface.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of upper decorative units 280 arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and on the front surface. The upper side decorative substrate 290 on which the LED 290a of the above is mounted, the substrate cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and the substrate cover 291 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward. The lower side of the mounting bracket 292, the upper lower cover 293 mounted on the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 have a large amount of translucency and are predetermined. It is provided with a top and bottom decorative cover 294 that is shaped into a shape.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a whose rear end side is open in the center in the left-right direction. It includes a cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 and shaped into a predetermined shape. ..

In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 shines with light from the outside. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing inside the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c facing the frame of the lower extension frame 281c are provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of strip-shaped lenses extending radially on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and the axial core of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of prisms extending concentrically are formed. As a result, the light can be diffusely refracted by the plurality of prisms and band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper center lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of lenses concentric on the rear side are formed, and light can be diffusely refracted, so that the rear side is clear. It is invisible to the lens.

Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper center lens 284 can be individually illuminated and decorated. Further, in the upper side decorative substrate 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c in the front decoration member 281. It is arranged at the position corresponding to each frame. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can illuminate the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and is stored in the upper plate 301. The game ball T can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit base 310. The front end of the dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed to the center of the front surface and the upper and rear sides are open and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward greatly, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are both front. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in the visual direction, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 arranged between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and covers the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is provided.

Further, the plate unit 300 is mounted on the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the right side, and is mounted on the plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface and the lower side of the substrate mounting base 320. It is provided with an upper plate decorative substrate 322 on which a plurality of LEDs 322a are mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312 to open the upper side and the rear side, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the front view, and the front end moves to the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the direction, and a dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate main body 324 A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, are located on a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right in front view. The lower plate cover 328 having the lock hole 328a facing the lower plate cover 328, and the upper opening 330a and the upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position on the left and right center left side of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328. It is provided with a lower plate right side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that opens to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 extending diagonally to cover the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. The lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, and the protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate from the rear side to allow sound to pass through, and protection. It is provided with a frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a formed in a continuous shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. It includes a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in a disk shape that is gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge toward the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. It can be protected as much as possible. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface thereof. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game ball T attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling out the game ball T attached to the lower surface of the lower plate 302 and stored in the lower plate 302, and the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It is provided with a ball lending unit 360 for operating the ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing the game ball T by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing the game ball T by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is equipped. A ball-renting unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball-renting unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in front view), has a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an upper plate ball supply port 310c and an upper plate ball supply. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction to the lower side near the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (approximately the middle in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate. It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e that are arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and project forward and have the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between a pair of lower plate support portions 310e and is fitted with the rear ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular ring-shaped lower plate support in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a tubular shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball T can pass.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is equal to the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference between the two is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540. However, since the upper plate ball supply port 310c cannot be linearly exited into the upper plate 301 in front, the dispensed game ball T comes into contact with the game ball T that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. The rolling direction changes, and the player is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in front view, and from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301. It will be released. As a result, the game ball T can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player can manually store the game ball T when the game ball T blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. It is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game ball T into the upper plate 301 without pulling the ball T, and the player feels annoyed about the storage of the game ball T in the upper plate 301. It can be suppressed, and the player can be devoted to the driving operation of the game ball T and the game by the driven game ball T to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, and the game ball on the upper plate 301. It is possible to increase the storage amount of T.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply trough 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port is provided by the expansion portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls T in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more balls can be prevented. The game ball T can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (shaft support side) of the plate unit 300 bulges forward from the center and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls T, which are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction and are supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301), are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It is supposed to be done.

A metal upper plate rail 313 capable of contacting the game ball T is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 313 is electrically grounded so that the static electricity charged on the game ball T can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction and into which the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. An operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting the operation unit 400, which will be described later, is provided in a stepped shape at the center in the left-right direction in front of the upper plate body 312 and further lowered from the decorative mounting portion 314b. There is.

The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in a rugged shape like this. Further, although detailed illustration of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by the plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be diffusely refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, whereas the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is uncertain.

The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The surface of the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape, similar to the portion on the right side of the front decorative member 316 of the upper plate. It is formed in an integral shape with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer circumference of the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), so that light can be diffusely refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. There is. The upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to fan out forward in a plan view, the rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction, and the substantially center of the upper surface is the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight portion of the upper end.

In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a silver-colored and metallic plating layer (a matte state as if sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 includes a plate-shaped portion that forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 that extends rearward from the lower end. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and are formed in the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is provided with a plating layer which is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. Further, the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and is a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 extending rearward from the lower end. It has a plate-shaped part that forms. The opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later, so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is made of punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in the metal plate to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted inside.

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334 close the bottom surface except for the center in the left-right direction, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate lower left cover 334 The bottom surface between the two is closed by the lower plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is designed for the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341 and the upper plate ball removing button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342, which moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the operating piece 342 are operably supported and the plate unit base 310. A contact piece that slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided with 343a and arranged behind the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 are slidably supported in the vertical direction and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310. It is provided with a punching base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. 43) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIG. 42 and FIG. (See FIG. 44), after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, extending substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removing base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c, which enables the distribution of the out-game ball T.

In the upper plate ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guidance flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to 580.

Further, in the ball pulling flow path 344c of the upper plate ball pulling base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball feeding port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending toward the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580. Can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 moves from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 via the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball extraction port 581b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and the ball pulling member 583 or the like can be absorbed. Can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is arranged between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left lower cover 334 of the lower plate on the lower side of the lower plate main body 324, and forms the central portion of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Rotate the plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 and the opening / closing shutter 352 that are rotatably supported on the upper surface of the punching base 351 and the lower dish ball punching base 351 and can open / close the lower dish ball punching hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal slider 353 that is slidably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removal button 354 that is attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removal slider 353. There is.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. 352b and the lower plate ball extraction base 351 are urged by a coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a is positioned to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 rotates the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b so as to move rearward, and the urging force of the coil spring 356 slides the lower plate ball removal slider 353 forward. You can do it.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. In order to hold the lower plate ball removal slider 353 in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. The lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball T can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slides backward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 352b. The game ball T stored in the lower plate 302, which coincides with 324b, can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball extraction slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball extraction slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slider 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of matching with the punching hole 3324b, and the game ball T stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower dish ball pulling button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slide 353 can be slid, and the closing portion 352a is urged in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball punching hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincided with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball T can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to display a predetermined number of game balls T into a plate unit. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301 of 300, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid card that you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount will be returned. ing. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan balance display unit 363, and is arranged behind the front cover 365 to which the loan balance display unit 363 is attached and the ball rental button 361. And the ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which the switch operated by the operation of the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. It is provided with a rear cover 367, which is attached to The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310 m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310 m. A transparent front cover 365 that includes a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of each of the two button openings 310m and projects forward, respectively, and closes the display opening 310n. The loan balance display unit 363 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

In the ball rental unit 360 of this example, as shown in the figure, the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 is arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and the front surface. It is arranged so that it faces. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (on the player side) from the outer circumference of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his / her hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be reminiscent of the machine, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new model pachinko machine), the feeling of anxiety given to the player can be reduced and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the press that the player can press. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, which can accept the player's operation according to the game state and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, and the player can only drive the game ball T. It is intended to enable participants to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular driven operation unit connected to an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and a lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. The operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, a gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416, and an opening 420a through which the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. The base is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. It mainly includes a member 420 and a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface while being arranged on the upper side of the cover body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass through, and the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface. A dial decorative substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the annulus of the above, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 to detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. It includes a 432b, a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 by the substrate holding claw 416g of the operation unit holding member 416.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is made of a translucent material, and has a tubular inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper end to the outside. An annular top plate 401b with a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder 401c shorter than the inner cylinder 401a extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a flange portion 401d extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c in a ring shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the dial operation unit 401 is locked by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the center at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The surface is sloped so that the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed tubular button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It includes a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction is provided in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and a dial operation unit on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and is larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from above the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The characters "Push" are displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the characters can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operating portion holding member 416, and the annular sliding surface abuts on the lower surface of the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connecting locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and details will be described later, but the rotation detection piece 410c and the rotation detection piece 410c are of each other. The slit 410d formed between them makes it possible to detect the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotationally drives the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Therefore, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) in small steps by the dial drive motor 414. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the button body 416b and a locking convex portion 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. The opening 416e desired from above by the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the button decorative substrate 432 extending downward from the lower surface. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and locks the button body 406. It further includes a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer circumference of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b in the vertical direction, and the operation holding member 416 An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and the motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the lower side. It is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of each leg portion 420e.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 projecting to. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, in the leg portion 420e of the base member 420, the positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with the positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later, and the base member 420. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently transferred to the base member 420, and the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the lower side open, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper part The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer circumference of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front-back direction in the pachinko machine 1) and the lower end protrudes outward. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from below with respect to the opening 422a with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper part, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the upper cover 422, and the legs of the base member 420 are located at predetermined positions on the upper surface of the bottom. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b capable of engaging with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper ends of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the engaging portions 424b By engaging the engaging claw 422b, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a through which the upper cover 422 can pass through in the vertical direction in the center, and an operation unit mounting of the dish unit 300 extending outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower surface of the outer circumference of the opening 426a are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted so as to be slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm), and the operation unit 400 is mounted. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when the cover body is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in a slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential distance corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although the details of the operation unit 400 of this example will be described later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. .. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since the 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation unit 405. By repeating the rolling and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operating unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game and the production. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that the player can rotate and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420, and the operation unit 400 Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely used by the player. In addition to being able to operate, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and it is possible to entertain the production using the operation units 401 and 405 and suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered. it can.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, suppressing the concentration of the hitting impact and preventing the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 able to withstand a bang, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely operated. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, when the cover body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c can receive an impact or a load, so that the impact or the like from the operation units 401 or 405 is dispersed to prevent the impact or the like from concentrating. It is possible to improve the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e projecting downward from the positions supporting the operation units 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation unit in the dish unit 300. Even if the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged directly under the impact, so that the operation units 401 and 405 of the base member 420 The part supporting the above is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operating units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view. When the operation unit 401 is struck from above, even if the operation unit holding member 416 holding the dial operation unit 401 deviates from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). As a result, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the production by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414 to appropriately drive the dial operation unit. It is possible to make the production using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and less likely to get tired of it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation shaft of 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted through the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being directly affected, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401 and the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a, the dial operation unit 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can come into contact with the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member. It is possible to surely prevent the depression from being lower than 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation unit 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation unit holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from the operation unit.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414. Even if the amount of heat generated is increased due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 even though the dial drive motor 414 is rotationally driven by the motor. The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414. The pachinko machine 1 can withstand a high load, can fully embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive means 414 as described above, and entertain the player. Can be.

Further, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the above, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, which is more suitable for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensational effect, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 come into contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation unit 405. Is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 repeatedly rotates forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range to vibrate the dial operation unit 401, thereby vibrating the dial operation unit 401 via the step portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, the player can be given an operation feeling for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move without permission, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can move freely to attract the player's attention to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. In addition to making it easier, the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 are brought into contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side as well, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the circumference of the axial center extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial in the operation unit 400. It is possible to reliably recognize the roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, making it easier for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The word "PUSH" does not rotate or tilt significantly, making it easier for the player to read, and making the player surely recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is the pressing operation. be able to.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a diameter smaller than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to each other at the upper end of the operation unit 400. The gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be improved through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and prevent the occurrence of problems such as the dial operation unit 401 becoming difficult to rotate or the pressing operation unit 405 becoming difficult to press due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 in the operating unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which of the dial operating unit 401 is in the circumferential direction. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed (pressing a position deviated to the outer circumference from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), it is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably transmit the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in circular contact with each other, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further improved.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, it may not be inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be radially dispersed in the outward direction in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the rotation axis, preventing the load from concentrating, and the resistance of the operation unit 400. The load resistance and impact resistance can be surely improved, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved, and the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not only simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, and forward rotation and reverse rotation can be performed. It can be easily vibrated by repetition, and the operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls T, it is probable that the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 for storing a large number of game balls T. Is high, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with a bang on the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. On the front of the handle base 502, which is fixed and cylindrical and whose front end bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the handle body 504 which is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle body 504. It is provided with a front end cover 506 that is arranged and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the rear 504 of the handle body in cooperation with the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506, and the handle body. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with the 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. It is provided with a rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is viewed clockwise in the front view via the transmission gear 511. With respect to the auxiliary spring 514 for urging, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the launch stop switch 518 attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to operate the launch stop switch 518, one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is placed in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). It is provided with a handle return spring 522 for urging the wheel to return to the rotating end in the direction of (1).

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a form in which the front end is open and the front end is rounded and bulges rearward, and the rear end is cylindrically extended to the rear. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylindrical shape of the above. The three grooves 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with arc-shaped slits 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward. These mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slit 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. When locked, the handle body 504 is urged to rotate counterclockwise in front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 on one end side.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view viewed from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) to form a door frame. It is designed to be mounted and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation is easy to perform without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 passes through the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are electrically plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball T is driven. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball T by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the launch solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball T can be driven. However, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing power supply board 831 stops the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654. It has become like. As a result, the firing of the game ball T can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before the single-shot button 520 is operated. It is possible to launch the game ball T with the driving strength of.

In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the firing power supply board 831 is based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are doord like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the links are released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a malfunction in driving the game ball T.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by the game ball T paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or the hit ball launching device 650. The game ball T (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 despite the fact is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has flow paths of a plurality of game balls T inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball inlet 542a arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a cover base communicating with the first ball entrance. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side in the front view toward the front end of 542, and the second ball entrance 542c that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. The second ball entrance 542c, which extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner in the front view, is provided inside the cover base 542 communicating with the second ball passage 542d. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. They are formed at positions facing each other (see FIG. 61 and the like). As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball T. Therefore, a storage space 546 capable of accommodating a predetermined amount of game balls T is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e, which is arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball entrance 542e, and can guide the game ball T to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. It is equipped with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing actuating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b, which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball T supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball. It can be supplied to the upper plate 301 from the outlet 544a via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball T supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball. It is possible to supply the lower plate 302 from the outlet 544b via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball T launched by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball T received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. It is possible to supply).

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingable by the game ball T stored in the accommodation space 546. The swing member 548 pivotally supported by the 542, the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and the swing member 548 are urged by the full tank detection sensor 550 in a direction in which the detection state is not detected. It is equipped with a spring 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side in the front view, and is substantially vertical. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And it is possible to remove the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the circulation of the game ball T.

In this example, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. When the game ball T is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 even if the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball exit in the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream of the 774 is also full, the game ball T is distributed to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the unit 770 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game ball T, the game ball T cannot be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game ball T cannot be discharged into the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The stagnant game ball T will be stored. Further, as the game ball T is discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large amount of the game ball T is stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game ball T acts on the swing member 548 and becomes the urging force of the spring 552. Against this, the upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the rocking member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 1101 (see FIG. 125) stops paying out the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700, and at the same time, the payout of the game ball T is stopped. The player is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball T in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball T in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. Is not detected, and the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. The ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls T supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The T can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having an entrance 581a penetrating the entrance and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a rear cover 582 having a ball striking supply port 582a for supplying the game ball T that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the ball launching device 650. A ball pulling member having a partition portion 583a which is rotatably supported between the front covers 581 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and which partitions the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The 583 and the game ball T on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and rotate around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. It includes a ball feed member 584 that can be supported and a ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, the ball feed member 583 is on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is on the right side. Have been placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 is provided with an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 583 on the left side of the ball extraction port 581b when viewed from the front. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584 by partitioning between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b below the entrance 581a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584, and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d projecting to the side opposite to the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110. The upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 is brought into contact with the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feed member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583. It is provided with a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball T. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 585. ing.

In the ball feed member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the supply position in the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball T held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 582a to the hitting ball launching device 650, and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The game ball T is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (striking ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the paddle portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball T on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a ball feed operating rod 586 that swings back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a shaft portion 587b and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. A transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in the above.

In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 transmit the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves up and down in the vertical direction to transmit the ball feed member. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball T, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 is released. The received game ball T is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launcher 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the firing power supply board 831 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 580 of this example is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 583c rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The rotation of the working rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by abutting with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. In the normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball T does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the abutting piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the working paddle 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball T that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the plate unit 300. It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating paddle 583c of the ball pulling member 583 contacts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, so that the ball pulling member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the T from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 of this example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B and the like) recessed forward in the upper right when the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear cover 582 is viewed from the rear. At the same time, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 has an overall outer diameter formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and is located on the left side in the rear view from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the opposite side. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c, and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending to the base end side (right side side) of the above as a boundary. A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588 (rearward) so as to move away from each other. It is provided with a character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 has a cut portion 588d by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed like this.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become like. In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the figure, and the cut portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582. The portion corresponding to the portion where the ball is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time is formed in a form of communicating with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is supplied to the gaming area of the game board 4 by the hitting ball launching device 650. When the ball is driven into the 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the ball launcher 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempts to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the wire rod Iw of the game ball T It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance in the passage. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move in the upper left direction (upper right direction in the rear view). Then, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a in order to move on the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the illegal game ball I.

As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I is pulled by the force of the fraudulent game ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in front view) at the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588. In this state, friction and shearing force act on the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire rod Iw (see FIG. 57 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw is attenuated due to friction acting on the wire rod Iw or the like, it is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 without invading the game area 1100. It will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent act is performed by the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw in the game area 605. It is designed to prevent it from being damaged. Even if the illegal game ball I invades the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588 as described above, so that the fraudulent act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the invasion of the inside, it is possible to prevent cheating.

As described above, according to this example, the game ball T is stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball T is supplied to the ball feed unit 580, and then the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is used for the game. When a person operates, the game ball T is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650, whereby the door frame 5 The game will be performed in the game area 1100 which is visible through the game window 101 of the door frame, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 584) can be placed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Since the ball feed unit 580 equipped with the ball feed solenoid 585 etc.) and the discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583) is arranged, not only the ball feed member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 but also the ball feed member 584 and the ball launching device The 650 is also in a state as close as possible, and when the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341, the number of game balls T remaining on the ball feed member 584 side is possible. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball T can be hit. It is possible to prevent the game ball T in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game ball T in the upper plate 301 from filling up early due to the loading operation, and the game in the upper plate 301. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player with respect to the ball T and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and the plate unit 300 can be miniaturized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The gaming area 1100 can be made relatively large (wide) so that the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball feeding member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are separately compared with the ball feeding member 583. If the 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached and the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced together with the game ball T, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be easily replaced. Even if a problem occurs in the ball feed unit 580, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feed unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. It is not necessary to configure the transmission mechanism (upper plate ball pulling mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pulling button 341 to the ball pulling member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (as compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened. By shutting off the precision ball removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism is consumed early and malfunctions or is damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball T can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward. The discharge of the game ball T from the 301 can be stopped, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

Further, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition portion 583a also moves in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition portion 583a as much as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed. The unit 580 can be miniaturized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball T vigorously abuts on the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal). The durability of the member 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball T collides with the partition portion 583a, it can be made difficult to repel, and the game ball T can be made difficult to repel. It is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged by the repelling of the ball feed unit and causing a problem.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball T is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in the plane projection. The same effect can be achieved.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other by its own weight, if a problem occurs in the partition portion 583a or the upper plate ball extraction mechanism 340, the partition portion 583a is rotated. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are communicated with each other, and the gaming medium in the storage dish is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being done, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is interesting to move it to the pachinko machine 1 without the problem. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in the ball removing member 583, the partition portion 583a is rotated via the bent rotating paddle portion 583b. Therefore, when the game ball T collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent and the rotating paddle is bent. By dispersing by the portion 583b or absorbing by the bending of the rotating paddle portion 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball pulling member 583 can be prevented. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the game ball T in the ball feed unit 580 is discharged when the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is discharged. It is possible to minimize the movement of the game ball T in the left-right direction, improve the passage of the game ball T in the ball feed unit 580, and discharge the game ball T satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game ball T in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cut portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball launching device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentum) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. By pulling the wire rod Iw quickly (strongly) with respect to the above, the wire rod Iw can be surely cut, and the momentum of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts by the fraudulent game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 provided with the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, in order to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 injures the operator during assembly or the like. It can be prevented from being lost.

Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent rearward across the dividing wire 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. As a result, since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It can be suppressed from increasing.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, and is an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It is provided with a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a arranged in the upper parts on both the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement piece extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a piece 592b.

The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on the door frame]
Next, the modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game ball T are arranged vertically under the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. At the same time, on the right side of the front view of the lower plate 302, the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. A handle device 500 for this purpose is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to.

The appearance of the door frame 5 is significantly different on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side has a metallic sharp and artificial appearance due to the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 that can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240. It has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 has a different amount of protrusion forward between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front When viewed from the side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, which can give a different impression depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become like. That is, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look like a different model of pachinko machine. It is possible to increase the appealing power to the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical to the left and right, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in the left-right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island equipment feels flat and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having different forms is to suppress the situation. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in the units 200, 220, 280, 300, etc., so that the game window 101 emits light. It is possible to illuminate and decorate with any luminescent color so as to surround the door. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. By turning on and off the, 254b, and 256, the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially circular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately emitting light from each LED, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the window can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the above is formed by one smooth and loosely curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214,216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is said to be an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. to make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214,216,254,256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from the light emitting LEDs 210a and 210b toward the player side by the substrate, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be prevented from becoming too dark. The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper center lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper center lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. It is provided with four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side of the front view is covered with the upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. The extension frame lens portion 282c in the above and the upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288 are provided. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decorative substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front surface, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be light-emitting and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a of the upper center decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, which is continuous with the appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In this plate unit 300, the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged behind the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate front decorative member 316 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate, which decorates the right side portion and the outer periphery of the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341, can be light-emittingly decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with LEDs 430b arranged in a plurality (four in this example) in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged outside the first annular group 102 (within the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 outside the first annular group 102. It is divided into (within the range of the crosshatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101 It is possible to make multiple (two in this example) light emitting decorations. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. (Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the ring by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is possible to make the luminescent decoration so as to divide it in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is designated as a notification group 105, and by appropriately emitting light of the LED 214c, a game is played. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of a game hall in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is said that the upper center group 106 is used to illuminate and decorate the upper center of the lens. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration that becomes a point. Further, the LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that emits light and decorates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be light-emitting and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 of the plate unit 300 arranged under the game window 101 causes the upper plate 301 to emit light and decorate. It is said to be dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the plate unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 press the operation unit 400. It is said to be an operation unit group 109 for luminescent decoration. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be set. It is possible to inform the player.

More specifically, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a provided in the door frame 5 will be described in more detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204, 246 (radiant lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d in the front-rear and left-right directions. Further, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 are left and right 109a and front and rear 109b as a set of four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which the 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, it is tripled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 288a and 430b are high-brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the actual light emission control has the same number of 10 systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As a light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential emission of the same color or a similar color), the light emission effect spreads outward centering on the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential emission of the same color or a similar color). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the entire outer circumference of the game window 101 is emitted to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LED provided in the game board 4 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first annular group 102 The LED of the second ring group 103 located on the outer side makes it possible to produce a more expressive light emission, which can strongly attract the interest of the player and entertain the player. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed along the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light of each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light moves toward the central lens 284, or the light moves along the outer circumference of the game window 101 from the upper central lens 284. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided (divided into 10) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer circumference of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect in which light is emitted radially around the game window 101 is produced, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By making it emit light, the entire outer circumference of the game window 101 is made to emit light substantially uniformly, or by making the radial group 104 emit light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by causing each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

Further, by emitting light of the upper center group 106 and the upper center side group 105, a chance has arrived for the player and a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probability change game state, a time saving game state, a probability change time reduction game state) , Etc.) can be suggested.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for illuminating and decorating the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation can be performed. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, it is possible to promote the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and to guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the systems 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 and each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, and it has a variety of expressions. It is possible to produce a rich light emission.

[1-3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. , The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 is capable of detachably holding the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 for axially supporting the door frame 5 as well as being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball T attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. The prize ball unit 700 for paying out and the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 that shuts off the flow.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape in the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 can be easily placed. Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part. 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 which is recessed from the front to the rear of the front end frame portion 602. Door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of the door frame, upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and opening side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It includes an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. It includes a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions when viewed from the front), and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1112 in the game board 4, and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulation ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are mounted with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and a launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface so that the launching solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, the ball launching device 650 is on the left side in the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660, in the left direction and A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball T is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an opposition wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 on the upper side of the opening 614 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604. It is provided with 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotation position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a and a fixing piece 690a that spread in a fan shape around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in the front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting the stopper 617, the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released so that the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction on the inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are arranged in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided on both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602 The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. The main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is provided so that the game ball T can be distributed by hanging from the middle of the vertical direction to a position slightly upward. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later, but the game ball T circulating through the ball pulling passage 741d in the prize ball device 740. Is now in circulation.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 are rotatably supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 diagonally to the upper left of the opening 614 in front of the lower rear wall portion 604, and a locking device 1000 on the right (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted and the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. It includes a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that regulates the ends. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. The door frame 642a is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion in the front view and regulates the rotating end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

In the lower shaft support bracket 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is in contact with each other. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state where they are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It has become like.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door frame 5 is slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3 C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball T supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. Is.

In the ball striking device 650 of the present embodiment, the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. The launching solenoid 654 attached so as to be mounted, the hammer 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. Hammer tip of ball hammer 656 between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, extending diagonally to the upper left of the front view with the predetermined position above as the base end. At the same time that 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball T cannot pass and holds the game ball T at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball T held in the ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. It is provided with a paddle portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the paddle portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a in between. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is recessed in a V shape, and the game ball T hit by the ball hammer 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. .. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation at a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the contact is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, when the ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and is lower. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601), and is outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed with the lower end of the rail 1111. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball T so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 to launch the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. You can type in it. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball T, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received at the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing power supply board 831 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball T to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball T, and from that state, the ball feed solenoid 585 When the drive of the ball feed unit 584 is released (OFF), the game ball T received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side. By driving (ON) the 654, the game ball T can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball T is reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. Can be done.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls T supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then pays out a predetermined amount. It is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the instruction. The prize ball unit 700 receives and stores the prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and the game ball T attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and supplied from the island equipment side. The 720, the tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and the game balls T stored in the prize ball tank 720 are aligned and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls T aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on a predetermined payout instruction and the game ball T paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is full with the game ball T. It mainly includes a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the paid-out game ball T to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600. It is integrally molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L-shape and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and is arranged substantially on the same surface. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and the external terminal plate 784 and the external terminal plate. An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, the prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and the rear. A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the wall portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and has an escape hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape, and the back. It includes a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed description is omitted on the prize ball base 710, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper portion, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721, the outer peripheral wall portion 722 rising upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721, and only the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) protruding rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. The eaves 724 extending to the eaves, the rod-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in a plan view, and the prize ball tank formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both ends on the front side of the outer peripheral wall 722. A mounting portion 726 for mounting the 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 on the prize ball base 710 is provided.

The outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls T can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, in the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball T on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become like.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls T circulating in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball T can be prevented from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the tank rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. The right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) in a plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball T can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball T can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls T to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction, and is the left end (shaft support side) end in the front view. The bottom is tilted so that the part is low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward to the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 74), which project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, are provided.

The right end (open side) end of the tank rail 731 is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After receiving the ball, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball T in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a piece 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball T in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to two flow paths of the game balls T partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and allow the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 to be inserted.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. Can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball T which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 so as to be.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer circumference, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls T flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls T arranged in two rows are alternately arranged one by one. It is designed to be sent to the prize ball device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with fine grooves that penetrate vertically, so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball T in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine grooves. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. The game ball T comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734a into the tank rail 730. By inserting it into, the projecting piece 735a can close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and the game ball T can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. ing.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the state of the game ball T or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game ball T discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. belongs to. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, etc., the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply that opens at the upper end and extends slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball T to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. The aisle 741a communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b has a space of a predetermined size. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface of the view, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the right side (shaft support side) of the rear view of the distribution space 741b and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support that is arranged under the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. The first gear 745, which is rotatably fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, meshes with the second gear 746, which meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 are the third gears. It is provided with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to the opposite side of the 747 so as to be integrally rotatable and has a plurality of detection slits 749a (three in this example) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball T attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number of the two, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 are held on the rear surface of the back cover 742. The sensor board 753 to be attached, the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the prize ball relay board 754 to be attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 1101. , Is equipped.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board 747). ), And the gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the sensor board 753 from the rear side, and the supply passage that can contact the game ball T circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 by sandwiching the ground fitting 757 and the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for connecting the payout motor 744 to the ground and the back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. It is provided with a detachable button 759.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball T discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 is relaxed. Can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (left side when viewed from the rear) below the rearwardly bulging position in the supply passage 741a, and is outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a penetrating portion in the front-rear direction below the prize ball passage 741a. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert the payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the working piece of the ball-cutting switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball T, the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 741e. In the state where the game ball T in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball out switch 741e (the ball out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the player or the player that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the hall side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. The ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and the button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 and supporting the detachable button 759 for attaching and detaching the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball T in the supply passage 741a. , The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball T circulating in the supply passage 741a is removed through the supply passage ground fitting 757. You can do it.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and has a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the upper part of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting. It is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c arranged below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 to generate heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball T at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and payout rotation. By rotating the body 748, the game balls T supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed one by one in the recess 748a, and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. .. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

The prize ball device 740 of this example is a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 1113, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 1101 or the ball ejection switch 860b is operated. The 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls T can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gear 747 rotates. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the third gear 747 on the front side, and a rotation detection board 794 is fixed to the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. Together with the third gear 747, the payout rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 747 are fixed. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the direction counterclockwise when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the rotating body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. .. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body The game ball T paid out to the ball pulling passage 741d side by 748 is a ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770, which will be described later, from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d, and a main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600. It can be discharged to the rear side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the prize is awarded from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the plate unit 300. When the game ball T is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball T can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the locking portion 770a which is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball T that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). ), The normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball T from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side, and the game ball T that has passed through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the front end, and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball T toward the front from a position far to the right of the rear view from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 ( (See FIG. 79), and a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball T that has passed through the full tank passage 775 forward and opens to the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end portion of the upper rear end in front view and receives the game ball T that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740. A ball-drawing passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball T received by the ball-extracting port 777 to the front side and a game ball T that has passed through the ball-drawing passage 778 are discharged forward and a normal ball at the left end in front view. It is provided with an outlet 774 and a ball outlet 779 which is opened at a position rearward from the full tank outlet 776.

In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball T released from the normal ball outlet 774 is communicated with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c facing each other, and the game ball T is passed through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and the plate unit 300. The game ball T supplied to the upper plate 301 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. There is. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper end of the right side of the rear view of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball T released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is the main body frame base. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 of 600.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball T that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball T that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal exit 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and enters the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game ball T and the game ball T is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first foul cover unit 540 The game ball T, which cannot exit from the ball outlet 544a to the upper plate 301 side, stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually passes through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 to the upstream normal passage 773. The inside is also full. In this state, the game ball T that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts moving laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. The game ball T enters the full tank passage 775, and the plate unit 300 is passed from the full tank outlet 776 through the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the lower plate 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. ..

As described above, when the game ball T is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example uses the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. , Since it can be automatically supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball T is supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball T from being interrupted due to the fact that the game ball T is not played, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example passes through the passage of the game ball T that is paid out directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when the upper plate 301 is full. Since the game ball T staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 is discharged to the upper plate 301, the game ball T in the upper plate 301 and the game ball T in the normal passage 773 are branched. Is a game ball T that can be directly hit by the hit ball launcher 650, and the storage amount of the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. Become. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls T as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be made to play a game. The pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the wide game area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (first). Even if there is only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c), the game ball T can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball T in the main body frame 3. At the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is changed, the main body frame 3 can be dealt with without changing, so that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole for changing the door frame 5 It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and provide various pachinko machines 1 at low cost.

Further, the game ball T sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame provided with only one storage plate. Even if it is replaced with 5, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage plate via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the interest of the player due to the shortage of the game ball T for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes. It has become.

Further, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 is sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game ball T stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is increased. It is possible to reduce the number, so that the player can concentrate on the driving operation of the game ball T and the like, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the entrance 542a or the like can be set to the same height as the first ball entrance 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates, the storage plate It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game ball T by deepening the storage plate, without causing the player to frequently worry about the storage amount. It is possible to play a game, and it is possible to correspond to a door frame 5 equipped with a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with the game ball T. Even if the game ball T cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 due to the tongue, the amount of the game ball T stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is as much as possible. The amount of the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. If the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the storage plate becomes full with the game ball T, and the game ball T cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank outlet 776. However, since the position where the full passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, not only the normal passage 773 but also the full passage 775 has many branches. The game ball T can be stored, and the substantially amount of the game ball T stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls T in each door frame 5 can be increased without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 which can increase the number to the maximum and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

Further, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls T to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of the game balls T staying in the full tank branch unit 770 (storage amount) ) Can be increased, so that even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different, the actual storage amount of the game balls T in the full tank branch unit 770 is reduced. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 which can be avoided and can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball T in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the full tank branch unit 770 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the game ball T is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and there is a problem. When it occurs, the location of the ball jam can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, the defect can be resolved at an early stage, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball T.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 that is slidably held in the shutter base 791 in the vertical direction, an opening / closing crank 793 that slides the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing shutter 792 that rises via the opening / closing crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the vehicle.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in a front view and rotatably supports an opening / closing crank 793 that extends in the front-rear direction. It includes a support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and an outer periphery on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive rod 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive rod 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, contact portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, the shutter base 791 is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 in the full tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which the shutter is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operating piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball T remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball T will spill from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. Can be prevented.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is mounted on the rear surface and has a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The terminal board box 840 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, the main relay terminal board 880 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral side relay. It includes a terminal board 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example has a form that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding from the front to the front, an opening 812 arranged above the position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end of the front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813. A tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 that penetrate in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and a left side of the rear view (right side of the front view). The rear surface of the upper portion is provided with a box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board base unit 810 passes the game ball T flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. You can send it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box accommodating portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box accommodating portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 are formed. As a result, it is possible to form an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-shaped passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and move forward. It is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting deeper bass with respect to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening port 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening port 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board box 830 is adapted to accommodate various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above in a storage recess formed by the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and the front box housing portion 844 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 63).

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 has a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current, which is the sum of the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is driven by passing a current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces thereof in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged is provided with heat dissipation holes. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. It is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the bottom surface. As a result, when the firing power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830 and the internal space of the firing power board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the firing power board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodating space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b and the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The storage space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the heat insulating wall for blocking the inflow and outflow of heat.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface respectively for communicating the accommodation space 830d and the outside air. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power board 831 can be replaced as it is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830, that is, the entire firing power board box 830 can be replaced.

Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive launch by the launch solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the firing power supply board 831 can be replaced. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be resolved extremely easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of island facilities such as a game hall, it is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared with the firing power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to aging.

Further, since the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 that holds the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristics can be changed. Even if you try to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to attach and detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. It is possible to make it difficult to cheat, and it is possible to suppress fraud that intentionally changes the driving strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the firing power supply board 831, and by making it difficult to cheat. It has become possible to use a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into fraud such as cheating.

Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is removable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is fraudulent, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the fraudulent operation is performed. It can be eliminated, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the person in the game.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. When replacing the game board 4, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) can also be easily replaced, so that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that can realize the driving characteristics that match the concept of the new model to be replaced and By replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the DC / DC converter 831a, the driving characteristics of the ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be matched with the new game board 4. it can. Therefore, since the driving characteristics of the game ball T can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, the game by the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. It can be suppressed.

In addition, since the launch power board 831 can be attached and detached from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 for island equipment such as a game hall when replacing the launch power board 831, which saves time and effort for replacement. It can be simplified and can be replaced in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (fired power supply board box 830) is removable and can be replaced, the cost for changing the driving characteristics is reduced as compared with the case where the entire payout control board 1101 is replaced. It is possible to reduce the burden on the hall side and the like.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing power supply board 831 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, so that a problem occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to solve the problem. It is possible to shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding port 601 in order to be attached and detached. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing fraudulent activity is inserted through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. It is possible to prevent the firing power supply board 831 from being cheated, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high defense against cheating.

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the firing power supply is supported. It is possible to easily secure a space for supporting the substrate box 830, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply substrate box 830 and exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be solved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side of the center on the left and right in the front view, and the game ball T discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 is discharged. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 to be received, the discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball T received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging, and the side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side when viewed from the front). A front box accommodating portion 843 that is open forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is formed so as to be recessed to the front side of the power supply board box 850. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating the front end.

In this power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is at a position desired to the discharge passage 842. It is formed, and flows through the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810, and is the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game ball T that has flowed down to the pachinko machine 1 and the game ball T that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 through the discharge passage 842, after the pachinko machine 1 It can be discharged downward to the side.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodating portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. It is possible to form a recess.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a vertical wall in which the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 in the power supply board 851 projects rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. It is provided with a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking claw that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the vertical wall portion 850b connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854. It is formed so as to protrude to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. Terminal 855 is designed to be connected.

By the way, if the connector terminal with the extended wiring cord is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) moves to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if it is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) to the rear side of the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent the terminal 855 from being pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided on both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 can be moved from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be done, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the front-rear direction dimensions in the assembled state are substantially the same as the front-rear direction dimensions of the speaker box 820, and the board unit base 810 is formed. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially identical to each other.

Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding to the rear side from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction that disconnects from the 853, and it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed and maintenance such as board replacement can be performed easily.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending condition of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the vertical wall portion 850b is located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that the vertical wall portion 850b is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and impossible. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the vertical wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 850b on the power supply board 851, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, etc. that cause a problem from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and the defense against fraudulent activities can be enhanced. It has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent a shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from the power supply board 851 and to cause a power failure due to breakage, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a problem.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to connect the wiring cord 854. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction that disconnects the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization from occurring.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided on both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 is used to bring the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b toward the standing wall portion 850b, it is difficult to remove the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to ensure that the above-mentioned action and effect are exhibited, and after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to perform a series of operations continuously, simplify the work process related to assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It includes a 862 and a payout control board 1101 (see FIG. 125) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are crimped and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation cutting portion 863 must be cut before the separation can be performed, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball ejection switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 1101 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 1113 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side of the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface of the right end of the rear view. On the board base 871 provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal board cover 873 which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a and a CR unit connection terminal 874a which faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. It includes a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection connection terminal board cover 873.

The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the frequency display for displaying the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871 and the connection terminal cover 873 and the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside are formed. The board 874 and the like can be visually recognized. Further, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display, the CR unit 6, etc. installed on the island equipment side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870 has a substrate mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed on a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting portion 871a to relay the peripheral panel. A locking claw 871c that locks the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

Further, in the board base 871, the board cover mounting portion 871b is formed in a thin box shape open to the rear side, and the size of the inner circumference thereof is set so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. At the same time, the inner peripheral wall is said to be an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 comes into contact with a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side when viewed from the rear in the left-right direction and the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e in the substrate base 871 has a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, it is possible to reach both ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is arranged so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged vertically separated from the rear surface on the right side of the rear view of the board cover mounting portion 871b, and has a pair of bearing portions 871 g for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end of the rear view. It is provided with a square tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 is an outer wall portion 873c that surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the substrate base 871. The rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, the rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and the rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending forward from 873a (on the board base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are held. It is provided with a pair of hook-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and abbreviated in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873 g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and the left side of the rear view is open, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the above, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c and can be locked into the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It is provided with a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side open by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to the rear by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be held detachably. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is formed by inserting the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It can be detachably attached to the board cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the substrate box cover 875 of the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and is entirely open to the front side, and is arranged on the right side surface of the substrate base 871. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole 875b forward from the left and right sides It includes an impact wall 875c extending to the surface and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a to the bearing portion 871g of the board base 871. There is. Further, the substrate box cover 875 has a length such that the impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length of 875c is set to extend to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective contact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become like.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. 88, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

Then, as shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. 871e and the outer piece 871c, and the outer wall 873c and inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact walls 875c are present respectively, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal is used. Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It has become like.

Further, the terminal board box 870 is a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through port 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the substrate box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. An impact wall 875c having a length straddling between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the formation of a gap, which makes it difficult to cheat and deters. It can be made expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873 g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord side fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even so, the protective portion 873 g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the electrodes from being inserted, and can prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are arranged from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a space or the like to allow the tip of the illegal tool to enter the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

Further, in the state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The protrusion 871e, the outer piece portion and 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each of the box cover 875 has an impact wall 875c, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. , For example, even if you try to invade an illegal tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal plate Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are reliably prevented. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of capable.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as the CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be reliably prevented.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. A substrate box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the axially supported side of the through hole 875b corresponding to the above to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 is further provided. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the parts of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and an illegal tool is inserted, the illegal tool is connected by the impact wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection terminal board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against cheating. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. It is possible to prevent the cover from being distorted and to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to cheat and making it highly deterrent.

Further, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body is covered with the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870. It is not possible to insert a needle-shaped electrode into the gap of the connector body from the (rear side), and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and the security capability is high. Can be.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform fraudulent acts, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It can be kept protected by, and it is not possible to cheat on the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a cannot be used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such things.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal board box 870 without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an illegal tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or is the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like itself replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like have been replaced with illegal ones. , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activity, and it is also easier to detect fraudulent activity. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are in a state of facing the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 are the peripheral control board 1116 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, the front side of the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is covered with the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 is a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a rental balance display unit 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The purpose is to relay the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the 512, the touch sensor 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control board 1116 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and projecting downward to be pivotally supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and a back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. It is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening to 3 in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. A vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 and the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking port that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long elongated hole 923b corresponding to an insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a plate-shaped guide member 923 inserted into the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side to form a main body 902. The fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 via the insertion hole 921 and the guide member 923 are attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. It includes a holding member 925 and. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and is supported along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening mechanism 920 projects the fastening member 924 to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engaging piece 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be obtained. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are in a substantially coincident state.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the locked guide member 923 of the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b and the fastening member 924 is rotated, so that the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 is inserted. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower right end of the front view of the main body 902 and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the front view of the connection notch 910. A 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape in the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view are provided.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 1103a, the test terminal 1103b, etc. of the main control board box 1103 in the game board 4 are passed through the connection notch 910. Is designed to face the rear side. Further, in the back cover 900, the board management sticker 1103c (see FIG. 5) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1103 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the back cover 900 is used for confirmation. The sealing portion 1103d of the main control board box 1103 faces through the cutout portion 914. As a result, it is possible to confirm the operation, appearance, management state, and the like of the main control board box 1103 and the main control board 1113 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at positions slightly to the left in front view from the center, which are wide and elongated in the vertical direction and arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. These through holes 918 are in a state in which the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the game board 4 is held. It is located behind a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control board 1116 and the like provided in the above, and heat from the peripheral control board 1116 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball T, so that the game ball T does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4 while the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3 because the game board 4 is held so as to be playable. Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1 because the fastening member 924 is held by the back cover 900 through the back cover 900. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing it from falling off.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been released from fastening at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , It can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is in an inclined state with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924a is surely in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 against the guide member 923 so as to be playable is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented from coming off. The fastening member 924 can be movably held by the guide member 923 by the gap between the two and the elongated hole 923b.

Further, a storage recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodating recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that other members come into contact with the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, and the occurrence of defects is reduced. You can do it and make it look good.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screwed to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened by simply pulling it as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 and to move the male screw portion 924 straight to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the locking port 923 along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900. Since it is elastically locked to 922, the tip side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the heart, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 to fasten only one place, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by engaging the engaging piece 908 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side (rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 of the back cover 900 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, simply by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 3, even if the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is rotatably supported. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, as shown in FIG. 68. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 on the right side (open side) side of the front view, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It is provided with fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin as compared with a locking device in which the width dimension thereof is integrated on a base molded into a conventional L-shaped cross section. As a result, the size of the lock device 1000 in the left-right direction can be made as thin as possible, and the size of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be made relatively large in the left-right direction. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped base 1001 is attached with the open side having a U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult to cheat on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate up and down on the closing side (front side) opposite to the opening side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side project forward. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screw fixing portion 1003 is inserted. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the screw device 1000, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and near the upper side of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the open side (front side) are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper part and the lock locking hole. The locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because the structure is such that the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws while being inserted into 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side projects from the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed in close contact with the main body frame 3.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 94. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, respectively. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021 and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected from the front end toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations above and below for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting on the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. It is a second engaging protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when the end side rotates.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the attachment holes 1013 formed in the upper and lower two places of the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped substrate 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally use a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention member 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on the plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projectile 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated on the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above the front surface. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. It swings (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 97 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from the diagonally rearward and lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. When the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Therefore, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And each are bored, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door sliding rod 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is designed so that the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending motion of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 comes into contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become like.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 behind the lower part of the vertical side. In this escape cutout portion 1049, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is surely engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating below the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the above hook member 1051 and contact portions 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivet, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked in the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for a rivet that penetrates in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion. An elongated hole 1061, a descending engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engaging hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower part of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. It is for engaging in such a way. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a movable space at the tip of the. Further, in the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, a bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and the layers are overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main body frame are passed through. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, the locking structure of the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96 (A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (B). The tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connects to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 96 (A)), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050, 1065 is formed of the closing plates 24, 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the ascending engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up and ascending the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 can be pulled by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 96A), but the door frame is closed. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The moving door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be securely locked in the total length in the vertical direction, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are forcibly opened and an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and moves in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Is not possible. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 97. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 penetrates into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engaging notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is used. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is formed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 97 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is the main body that prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are completely covered by being housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent equipment from entering the closed space, making it impossible to easily commit fraudulent activities.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device whose width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. , A piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside, and other fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with screws, which is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed together. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole that penetrates the piece 1008 and is screwed may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) simply by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) is used, and a sliding rod for a door frame 1040 and a sliding rod for a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) and a first side wall 540. A structure for storing the 1050 may be used, and the same effect as that of the lock device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game ball T supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the game ball T discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned and the rear wall of the prize ball base. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the portion 710b and the game ball T released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and after the prize ball base 710. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the wall portion 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since it is provided with a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as the above, it is behind the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. A pachinko machine that can visually check the side and the rear side, and can easily inspect (visually inspect) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. It can be 1.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be visually recognized. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the front side to 601 even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they are left outside. It can be easily found from, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an illegal device, a tool, or the like for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, and it is possible to easily find a fraudulent device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to install an illegal device or the like, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 may be covered. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and prevent problems from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is set to be approximately twice as deep as the front end of the main body frame base 600 with respect to the depth D of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to form a flat shape. It is possible to facilitate the attachment work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the protrusions to the rear, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or in contact with other members in the installed island facility. It can be prevented to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a cushioning material having a simple shape can be used when transporting the pachinko machine 1, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be transported. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 and the like can be made easier to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slit 916 or the like of the back cover 900. , It is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent problems such as instability of control related to the game due to heat and deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball T cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball T spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 It is possible to prevent the game ball T from invading the pachinko machine 1 through the above, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the invasion of the game ball T.

[2. Game board configuration]
The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125. As shown in FIG. 98, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is attached to the frame-shaped front component 1111 that partitions the outer peripheral side of the game area 1100 and the rear side of the front component 1111. A flat plate-shaped game panel 1112 that partitions the rear end side of the game area 1100 is provided.

The outer peripheral shape of the front component 1111 is formed in a quadrangular shape, and the inner peripheral shape is formed in a substantially semicircular shape on the left side and a substantially U-shaped shape on the right side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view. The front component 1111 forms a first inner wall portion 1111a that is smoothly connected by the entire semicircular portion on the inner peripheral surface and the portion extending to the left and right above the U-shaped portion. In the U-shaped portion, the remaining vertically extending portions and the lower left and right extending portions form an L-shaped second inner wall portion 1111b. Further, the front component 1111 is a guide wall extending in an arc shape along the first inner wall portion 1111a from the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b (the left end of the front view of the portion extending to the left and right) to the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view. It includes 1111c and a check valve 1111d rotatably attached to the upper end of the guide wall 1111c.

The game panel 1112 is formed with an out port 1112a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower end of the inner circumference of the front component 1111 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 1112a is formed at a position where the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 and the lower end of the guide wall 1111c are connected. Further, the game panel 1112 is formed with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction at substantially the center of the game area 1100.

Further, the game board 4 includes a board holder 1102 (see FIG. 6) attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1112, a main control board box 1103 attached to the board holder 1102, and a main control board box 1103. The main control board 1113 (see FIG. 125) that is housed inside and controls the game content, and the function that displays the game state and the like based on the control signal from the main control board 1113 and is attached to the front component 1111. It is provided with a display 1114.

Further, the game board 4 is mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1112 so as to be visible from the front side through the opening of the game panel 1112, and is mounted on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1115 and is mainly controlled. A peripheral control board 1116 that controls a liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like based on a control signal from the board 1113 is provided. Further, the game board 4 includes a front unit 1120 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112 in the front view game area 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1112 (see FIG. 6). , Is equipped.

The front unit 1120 is attached to approximately the center of the game area 1100 in front view, and divides the game area 1100 into left and right center accessory 1130, and a winning opening attached to the lower side of the center accessory 1130. It is equipped with a unit 1150.

[2-1. Center role]
The center accessory 1130 is formed in a frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the game panel 1112 in a state of being inserted from the front side into the opening of the game panel 1112. The center accessory 1130 releases the warp entrance 1131 in which the game ball T can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view and the game ball T that has entered the warp entrance 1131 and opens in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. It is equipped with a warp outlet 1132.

Further, the center accessory 1130 includes a right flow path 1133 through which the game ball T can flow on the right side of the front view, and a gate member 1134 arranged in the right flow path 1133 through which the game ball T can pass. The gate member 1134 includes a gate sensor 1135 that detects the passage of the game ball T.

The right flow path 1133 of the center accessory 1130 opens upward in the front component 1111 below the abutting portion 1111e where the first inner wall portion 1111a and the second inner wall portion 1111b in the upper right corner of the front view intersect. A gate of a predetermined size connected to the entrance 1133a, the approach path 1133b that guides the game ball T downward from the entrance 1133a, and the lower end of the approach path 1133b, and the gate member 1134 is arranged in the center. The game is open at the lower ends of the taxiway 1133d and the taxiway 1133d that guide the game ball T downward along a part of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component 1111 from the lower end of the space 1133c and the gate space 1133c. It includes a discharge port 1133e that discharges the sphere T downward.

In the right flow path 1133, the entrance 1133a opens larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the approach path 1133b following the entrance 1133a has a width slightly wider on the lower end side than the outer diameter of the game ball T. It is formed so as to become narrower toward the bottom. The gate space 1133c is widened vertically and horizontally below the approach road 1133b, and is formed on both the left and right sides of the gate member 1134 arranged substantially in the center so that the game ball T can flow down. In this gate space 1133c, the gate member 1134 is arranged at a position slightly to the right of the front view from directly below the approach road 1133b. The bottom surface of the gate space 1133c is inclined so as to be lowered to the right side in the front view, and the upper end of the taxiway 1133d is opened at the lowest right end portion.

The taxiway 1133d extends in an arc shape along a portion of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 that extends vertically. As shown in FIG. 98 and the like, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the inner wall of the taxiway 1133d, and when the game ball T comes into contact with these protrusions, the flow speed of the game ball T can be suppressed. This taxiway 1133d extends downward to a height of about half of the total height of the game area 1100. The discharge port 1133e at the lower end of the taxiway 1133d opens slightly to the left in front view.

[2-2. Outline structure of winning opening unit]
The winning port unit 1150 is arranged below the discharge port 1133e of the right flow path 1133 in the center accessory 1130, and has a general winning port 1151 capable of constantly accepting the game ball T and a warp outlet 1132 of the center accessory 1130. The first start port 1152, which is arranged on the lower side and can always receive the game ball T, and the second start port, which is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first start port 1152 and is always open into the game area 1100. The large winning opening 1154, which is located below the 1153 and the first starting port 1152 and can accept the game ball T by opening and closing according to the game state, and the second starting port 1153 on the right side of the front view. A game that is arranged under the character winning opening 1155 and the character winning opening 1155 that can be accepted by opening and closing the game ball T according to the game state. It is equipped with a V winning opening 1156 that can accept the ball T.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 103, the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a first starting port 1152 and is attached to a flat plate-shaped base plate 1160 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112 and to the front surface of the base plate 1160. A transparent front flow path forming member 1161 that is provided with a general winning opening 1151 and forms a flow path of the game ball T, and a transparent front surface that is attached to the front side of the front flow path forming member 1161. The decorative plate 1162, the attacker unit 1200 which is arranged in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is provided with the large winning opening 1154 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the front of the attacker unit 1200. The variable start port unit 1210, which is arranged diagonally to the upper right of the view and is provided with the second start port 1153 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the variable start port unit 1210 are arranged on the right side of the front view. In addition, the accessory winning opening 1155 and the V winning opening 1156 are provided, and the accessory unit 1220 attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 is provided.

Further, the winning port unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the first starting port guide member 1163 for guiding the game ball T received by the first starting port 1152 downward, and the first starting port A ball detection sensor 1164 that is attached to the guide member 1163 and detects the game ball T received in the first starting port 1152, and an LED that is arranged behind the first starting port 1152 and mounted on the front surface. The first starting port decorative board 1165, the board stay 1166 that supports the first starting port decorative board 1165 and is attached to the first starting port guide member 1163, and the base at the lower position of the attacker unit 1200. It is provided with a large winning opening decorative substrate 1167 which is attached to the rear side of the plate 1160 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface.

Further, the winning port unit 1150 is arranged on the rear side of the base plate 1160 and above the second starting port 1153, and has a second starting port decorative board 1168 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a second starting port. The start port reflector 1169, which covers the front side of the decorative substrate 1168 and is attached to the variable start port unit 1210, and the second start port 1153, which is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 at a position below the variable start port unit 1210. The guide member 1170 for the second start port that guides the game ball T received in the lower direction and the game ball T that is attached to the guide member 1170 for the second start port and is received in the second start port 1153 are detected. A ball detection sensor (not shown), an attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200, a starter solenoid 1215 of the variable starter unit 1210, and a main control board 1113 mounted on the rear side of the guide member 1170 for the second starter. It is provided with a first relay board 1172 that relays the connection of the above, and a board cover 1173 that covers the rear side of the first relay board 1172 and is attached to the rear side of the guide member 1170 for the second starting port.

Further, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the accessory unit 1220 and covers the rear side of the accessory unit 1220, and the accessory unit cover 1174 on the upper side of the accessory winning opening 1155. The accessory winning opening decorative board 1175, which is arranged at the upper part of the front surface and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the accessory winning opening decorative board 1175, which covers the front side of the accessory winning opening decorative board 1175 and is attached to the accessory unit cover 1174. The mouth reflector 1176, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the center of the front surface of the accessory unit cover 1174, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the accessory unit cover 1174, and the accessory winning solenoid 1225 of the accessory unit 1220. And the second relay board 1178 that relays the connection between the V winning solenoid 1232 and the main control board 1113, and the game ball T that is attached to the rear side of the accessory unit cover 1174 and is received in the general winning opening 1151 downward. A general winning opening guide member 1179 for guiding, a general winning opening sensor 1180 (see FIG. 125) that is attached to the general winning opening guide member 1179 and detects a game ball T received by the general winning opening 1151. It has.

The base plate 1160 of the winning opening unit 1150 has a receiving portion 1160a and a receiving portion 1160a which project forward to the upper part of the left portion in the front view and are open upward and rearward to form the first starting opening 1152. At the attacker opening 1160b, which penetrates back and forth on the lower side and extends to the left and right, and the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200, which will be described later, is inserted from the rear side, and the upper part of the central portion in the left-right direction in the front view. The second starting port opening 1160c, which penetrates back and forth and the second starting port 1153 faces the rear side, and the second starting port opening 1160c, which penetrates back and forth to the left and extends in a slit shape, are variable as described later. The door slit 1160d through which the front side of the start port door member 1214 of the start port unit 1210 can pass, and the second start port are arranged on the left and right at positions on the upper side of the door slit 1160 d on the front side of the start port reflector 1169. The second starting port upper shelf light emitting decoration unit 1160e, which is light-emittingly decorated by the LED of the decorative substrate 1168, is provided.

Further, the base plate 1160 penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the second starting port upper shelf light emitting decoration portion 1160e, and forms the accessory winning opening 1155 described later of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A in the accessory unit 1220. The accessory winning opening opening 1160f, which is inserted so that the front portions of the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 project from the rear side to the front, and the accessory winning opening reflector 1176 above the accessory winning opening opening 1160f. It penetrates back and forth under the accessory winning opening light emitting decoration part 1160g, which is lined up on the left and right at the front side and is lit by the LED of the accessory winning opening decoration board 1175, and the accessory winning opening opening 1160f. The V winning opening opening 1160h, in which the ball guiding member 1238 described later of the V winning opening unit 1220B in the accessory unit 1220 is inserted so as to project forward from the rear side, and the rearward to the upper part of the right side of the front view. The gutter 1160i that guides the game ball T received in the general winning opening 1151 of the front flow path forming member 1161 in the shape of a girder that extends and opens upward to the rear and delivers it to the general winning opening guide member 1179. And have.

The front flow path forming member 1161 projects from the front surface of the flat plate-shaped base plate 1160 into the game area 1100 in front of the flat plate-shaped base plate 1160, and is formed in a shallow box shape with the flat front plate portion 1161a as the front surface and the rear side open. ing. The front flow path forming member 1161 has a receiving portion 1161b and a receiving portion 1161b whose upper and rear sides are open to the upper right of the front view and guides the game ball T received from the upper side to the rear to form the general winning opening 1151. A shelf-shaped lower shelf portion that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T and extends downward from the right side of the receiving portion 1161b to the extension line of the left side of the receiving portion 1161b so that the left side is lower. The 1161c, the lower right standing wall portion 1161d of the receiving portion extending downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 1161c of the receiving portion to the upper part of the accessory winning opening 1155, and the left side of the receiving portion 1161b farther from the outer diameter of the game ball T. A position below the lower shelf portion 1161c of the receiving portion and above the accessory winning opening 1155 (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A described later). From the lower end of the receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e extending vertically to the receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e, along the upper side of the accessory winning opening 1155 to the upper right side of the left end of the accessory winning opening 1155. It is equipped with an upper top wall portion 1161f of the accessory winning opening extending to.

Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is lowered to the left from the position in contact with the left end of the accessory winning opening 1155 (accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221) on the lower left side of the left end of the upper top wall portion 1161f of the accessory winning opening. A short extension of the left shelf portion 1161g of the accessory winning opening and a right standing wall portion 1161h of the second starting opening region extending vertically from the right end of the accessory winning opening left shelf 1161g below the second starting opening 1153. The second starting port region lower shelf portion 1161i extends to the left so that the left side is lowered from the lower end of the second starting port region right vertical wall portion 1161h to the left end of the front flow path forming member 1161.

Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is separated from the right standing wall portion 1161h of the second starting port region to the left by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the game ball is separated from the upper surface of the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161 g. It extends to the left to the upper position on the left side of the center of the lower shelf 1161i in the second starting port area so that the left side is lower than the position separated from the lower side by a distance larger than the outer diameter of T. (2) The second starting port upper shelf 1161j arranged at a position directly above the second starting port 1153 and the second starting port upper shelf 1161j hang down from the right end so as to cover the right side of the second starting port 1153. The outer diameter of the game ball T from the left end of the second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k, the guide piece 1161l protruding to the left from the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k toward the front, and the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. It is provided with a second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161 m which is slightly larger than the left side and extends vertically from a position above the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j to a position below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j.

The winning port unit 1150 of the present embodiment includes a ball detection sensor 1164 attached to the guide member 1163 for the first start port and a ball detection sensor 1208 to be described later attached to the attacker unit 1200. The first start port sensor 1190 that detects the game ball T received by 1152 is formed. Further, a ball detection sensor (not shown) attached to the guide member 1170 for the second start port and a ball detection sensor 1213 to be described later attached to the variable start port unit 1210 were accepted by the second start port 1153. A second starting port sensor 1191 for detecting the game ball T is formed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the winning opening unit 1150 is provided in the large winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting the game ball T received in the large winning opening 1154 of the attacker unit 1200 and the accessory winning opening 1155 of the accessory unit 1220. It includes an accessory winning opening sensor 1224 that detects the accepted game ball T, and a V winning opening sensor 1239 that detects the game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 of the accessory unit 1220.

[2-2A. Attacker unit]
As shown mainly in FIGS. 104 to 106, the attacker unit 1200 of the winning opening unit 1150 has a large winning opening 1154 that opens forward and extends in the left-right direction in the front view, and a large winning opening 1154. The attacker lower base 1201 that forms the lower part, the attacker upper base 1202 that is attached to the upper side of the attacker lower base 1201 and is attached to the base plate 1160, and forms the upper part of the grand prize opening 1154, the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper Attached between the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203, which is rotatably supported by the base 1202 around an axis extending in the left-right direction and opens and closes the large winning opening 1154, and the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202. An attacker solenoid 1204 having a plunger 1204a that advances and retreats according to the game state, a link member 1205 that transmits the advancement and retreat of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 to open and close the grand prize opening opening and closing member 1203, and under the attacker. A game that is attached to the base 1201 and detects the game ball T received by the large winning opening 1154, and a game that is attached to the lower side of the base 1201 under the attacker and detected by the large winning opening sensor 1206. It includes a guiding member 1207 that guides the ball T rearward, and a ball detection sensor 1208 that is attached to the upper part of the attacker upper base 1202 and detects the game ball T received at the first starting port 1152.

The large winning opening 1154 formed in the attacker unit 1200 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the horizontal direction in the front view is 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball T and the vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball T. The opening is opened toward the front, and the opened opening can be opened and closed by the plate-shaped large winning opening opening / closing member 1203. In this large winning opening 1154, the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially vertical state, the game ball T cannot be accepted. This is a so-called variable winning opening that allows the game ball T to be accepted when the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially horizontal state.

The attacker lower base 1201 of the attacker unit 1200 is arranged to the left from the center in the left-right direction, and penetrates vertically through the horizontally long box-shaped housing portion lower 1201a with the front and upper sides open and the bottom wall of the housing portion 1201a. A through hole 1201b through which the ball T can pass, a sensor support hole 1201c formed under the through hole 1201b and into which the large winning opening sensor 1206 is inserted from the rear side, and lower front sides at both left and right ends of the housing portion lower 1201a. A pair of bearing portions 1201d arranged, a solenoid support portion 1201e formed on the rear side of the right portion of the accommodation portion lower 1201a, and a U-shape formed on the front side of the solenoid support portion 1201e and on the right side of the accommodation portion lower 1201a. It is provided with a shaft support portion 1201f, and a passage hole 1201 g formed at the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the housing portion lower 1201a and through which the game ball T can pass vertically.

The housing portion 1201a of the attacker lower base 1201 forms the lower half of the large winning opening 1154, and the bottom wall is inclined so as to be lowered toward the through hole 1201b. The pair of bearing portion lower 1201d is for rotatably supporting the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 in cooperation with the bearing portion upper 1202b of the attacker upper base 1202, which will be described later. The shaft support portion 1201f can pivotally support the link member 1205 by inserting the rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 from above. The passage hole 1201g is received by the first starting port 1152, and the game ball T passes through the through hole 1202e of the attacker upper base 1202.

The attacker upper base 1202 of the attacker unit 1200 is arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged on the lower front surface of the horizontally long box-shaped accommodating portion 1202a with the front and lower sides open and the lower front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the accommodating portion 1202a. 1202b on the pair of bearings, a shaft hole 1202c that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the housing 1202a and into which the rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is inserted, and formed on the upper rear side of the housing 1202a. The sensor support portion 1202d into which the ball detection sensor 1208 is inserted from above and the through hole 1202e through which the game ball T can pass vertically in the right portion of the sensor support portion 1202d are provided. ..

The accommodating portion 1202a of the attacker upper base 1202 cooperates with the accommodating subordinate 1201a of the attacker lower base 1201 to form a large winning opening 1154. The pair of bearing portion upper 1202b is for rotatably supporting the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 in cooperation with the bearing portion lower 1201d of the attacker lower base 1201. The shaft hole 1202c is for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 1205a described later of the link member 1205. The game ball T received by the first starting port 1152 and detected by the ball detection sensor 1208 passes through the through hole 1202e.

The large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a extending to the left and right, a pair of shaft pins 1203b extending outward from the lower left and right ends of the door portion 1203a, and a door portion 1203a. The action pin 1203c is provided so as to project to the right from a position diagonally below the shaft pin 1203b on the right end side of the above.

The door portion 1203a of the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is formed in a size capable of closing the large winning opening 1154 formed by the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202. The pair of shaft pins 1203b are rotatably supported by the pair of bearing portion lower 1201d and the pair of bearing portion upper 1202b of the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202, respectively. The working pin 1203c is inserted between the pair of working pins 1205c described later of the link member 1205.

The attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 is supported between the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202 in a state of being inserted into the solenoid support portion 1201e of the attacker lower base 1201 so that the plunger 1204a moves forward and backward from the right end side. .. Further, the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 has a disk-shaped tip. The attacker solenoid 1204 includes a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1204a protrudes due to the urging force of the coil spring.

The link member 1205 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a rotating shaft 1205a extending in the front-rear direction, an engaging portion 1205b protruding rearward from a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 1205a, and a rotating shaft 1205a. It is provided with a pair of operating pins 1205c protruding forward from a position eccentric from the axis of the shaft. The rotating shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is rotatably supported by the shaft support 1201f of the lower base 1201 of the attacker and the shaft hole 1202c of the upper base 1202 of the attacker. The engaging portion 1205b is formed with a notch into which the disk-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a in the attacker solenoid 1204 is inserted. The working pins 1203c of the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 are inserted between the pair of working pins 1205c.

In this link member 1205, the engaging portion 1205b moves mainly in the left-right direction while the relationship between the engaging portion 1205b and the pair of operating pins 1205c is attached to the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202. The pair of actuating pins 1205c are arranged so as to move mainly in the vertical direction. Then, when the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 moves in the immersive direction (front view left direction) from the protruding state, the link member 1205 rotates in the front view clockwise direction.

The guide member 1207 of the attacker unit 1200 is formed in a box shape with the upper and rear sides open, and is attached to the lower side of the through hole 1201b in the attacker lower base 1201.

In the attacker unit 1200 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the plunger 1204a protrudes to the right due to the urging force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the upper operating pin 1205c of the pair of operating pins 1205c is in contact with the operating pin 105c of the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 from above, and the flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a is in an upright state. The grand prize opening 1154 is closed. That is, the game ball T cannot be accepted with respect to the large winning opening 1154.

When the attacker solenoid 1204 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the attacker unit 1200 moves the plunger 1204a to the left and is in a state of being immersed except for the disk-shaped tip. By moving the plunger 1204a to the left, the engaging portion 1205b of the link member 1205 engaged with the disk-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a revolves so as to move to the left, and the link member 1205 rotates. It rotates clockwise in the front view around the moving shaft 1205a.

By rotating the link member 1205 clockwise, the pair of actuating pins 1205c revolve so as to move upward, and the upper actuating pin 1205c moves upward from the actuating pin 1203c of the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203. , The lower working pin 1205c comes into contact with the working pin 1203c from the lower side, and further moves the working pin 1203c upward. Then, the large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 rotates so that the upper end moves forward around the shaft pin 1203b, and the flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a becomes a substantially horizontal state. As a result, the large winning opening 1154 is opened, and the game ball T to the large winning opening 1154 can be accepted.

[2-2B. Variable start port unit]
As shown mainly in FIGS. 108 to 113, the variable starting port unit 1210 of the winning opening unit 1150 includes a second starting opening 1153 that opens forward to the right portion of the front surface in the front view. The second starting port 1153 is formed in a size that allows only one game ball T to pass through. The variable starting port unit 1210 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 1211 with the front and upper sides open, and a box-shaped upper case 1212 attached to the upper side of the lower case 1211 with a part of the front and the lower side open. A ball detection sensor 1213 that is attached to the lower case 1211 and detects the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153, a starting port door member 1214 that is slidably supported back and forth by the lower case 1211, and a lower case. The start port solenoid 1215, which is supported between the 1211 and the upper case 1212 and has a plunger 1215a that advances and retreats according to the gaming state, and the start port door member 1214 that transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 are moved back and forth. It is provided with a link member 1216 that slides in and a slide detection sensor 1217 that detects the slide position of the start opening door member 1214.

The lower case 1211 of the variable starting port unit 1210 is formed in a state of being inclined so as to be lowered from the front side to the rear side at the position of the right portion of the upper surface, and the ball guiding portion 1211a capable of guiding the game ball T and the ball guiding portion 1211a. A passage hole 1211b that penetrates up and down on the rear end side of the ball guide portion 1211a and allows the game ball T to pass through, and a ball detection sensor 1213 that opens forward on the lower side of the ball guide portion 1211a to support insertion. The sensor support hole 1211c to be formed, a pair of slide grooves 1211d formed in the center in the left-right direction and facing each other and extending in the front-rear direction, and a columnar support pin 1211e protruding upward from the left portion of the upper surface. , Is equipped.

The upper case 1212 of the variable starting port unit 1210 has an upper passage portion 1212a which is open at the front and lower sides at the position of the right side of the front view and is inclined so that the upper wall becomes lower toward the rear. In the case 1212, the second starting port is decorated between the front end opening forming portion 1212b forming the lower surface on the front end side on the left side of the front view from the upper part 1212a of the passage and the base plate 1160 formed on the upper side of the front end opening forming portion 1212b. A substrate rear holding portion 1212c that sandwiches the substrate 1168 and the starting port reflector 1169, and a solenoid covering portion 1212d that is formed on the rear side of the substrate rear pressing portion 1212c and the front end opening forming portion 1212b and covers the starting port solenoid 1215 from above. It has.

The passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212 forms a second starting port 1153 at a position above the ball guide portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b in the lower case 1211. The front view of the upper portion 1212a of the passage is U-shaped with the opening facing downward, and the right side is formed to extend downward longer than the left side. In addition, the passage upper portion 1212a can guide the game ball T backward by cooperating with the ball guiding portion 1211a.

The front end of the front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212 is formed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front end of the passage upper portion 1212a. Further, the front end opening forming portion 1212b extends in a plate shape from the front end to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the upper case 1212. The shape of the front end opening forming portion 1212b is 1/3 of the height of the left side of the passage upper part 1212a at a small angle (about 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the passage upper part 1212a to the left. After extending diagonally to the height of, it extends to the left at a large angle (about 45 degrees) to the same height as the upper part of the aisle 1212a, and further extends to the left from there, and then extends horizontally to the upper part of the aisle. The 1212a is formed in a shape extending downward to a height intermediate between the lower end of the left side and the lower end of the right side.

In other words, the front end opening forming portion 1212b extends upward from the vicinity of the left end at the lower end of the upper case 1212 to the same height as the upper passage 1212a, and extends horizontally shortly from the upper end to the right, and then lower right. It extends from the lower end of the left side of the upper passage 1212a to a height of about 1/3 of the height of the left side at an angle of about 45 degrees to the horizontal, and further lowers the right side from there to the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the upper passage 1212a. It extends diagonally long. The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the like of the start opening door member 1214 are arranged below the front end opening forming member 112b and the passage upper portion 1212a.

The start port door member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 has a flat plate-shaped first guide portion 1214a extending diagonally (at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal) toward the lower right of the front view, and a first guide portion. A flat plate-shaped second guide portion 1214b extending diagonally from the right end of 1214a to the lower right of the front view at a smaller angle (about 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, and the second guide portion 1214b. A flat plate-shaped third guide portion 1214c provided at a position lower than the right end of the second guide portion 1214b on the right side of the right end and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear, and a front end of the third guide portion 1214c. The front wall portion 1214d extending from the right end of the second guide portion 1214b to the same height as the right end, and the flat plate-shaped standing wall portion 1214e extending upward from the right end of the third guide portion 1214c to the upper side of the front wall portion 1214d. And have.

Further, the starting door member 1214 includes a hanging portion 1214f extending downward from the rear end of the second guide portion 1214b, a flat plate-shaped slider portion 1214g extending rearward from the lower end of the hanging portion 1214f, and a slider. It includes a columnar connecting pin 1214h protruding from the upper surface of the portion 1214g, and a detection portion 1214i formed at the rear end of the slider portion 1214g.

The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e of the starting door member 1214 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The width of the first guide portion 1214a and the like in the front-rear direction is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T. Further, the left and right lengths of the starting door member 1214 (the length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a to the right end of the standing wall portion 1214e) are formed to be about four times as long as the outer diameter of the game ball T. Has been done. Further, the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in a plan view are formed to be about two-thirds as long as the outer diameter of the game ball T. The first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b are arranged below the front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212. Further, the third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e are arranged between the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212.

The left and right ends of the slider portion 1214g of the start door member 1214 are inserted into the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211, respectively. As a result, the start door member 1214 is slidably supported back and forth by the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211. The connecting pin 1214h is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 1216e described later of the link member 1216 to be connected to the link member 1216, and the advance / retreat of the plunger 1215a of the starting port solenoid 1215 is transmitted. The detection unit 1214i can be detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

The start port solenoid 1215 of the variable start port unit 1210 is supported in the solenoid covering portion 1212d of the upper case 1212 between the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward from the left end side. The plunger 1215a of the starting port solenoid 1215 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at the tip. Further, the starting port solenoid 1215 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and the plunger 1215a is in a state of protruding (extending) due to the urging force of the coil spring when the power is not supplied.

The link member 1216 of the variable starting port unit 1210 has a cylindrical main body portion 1216a that is rotatably fitted into the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 from above, and a first piece 1216b that extends outward from the main body portion 1216a. With respect to the engaging portion 1216c that protrudes upward from the tip of the first piece 1216b and can engage with the tip of the plunger 1215a of the starting port solenoid 1215, and the direction in which the first piece 1216b extends from the main body portion 1216a. The second piece 1216d extending at a right angle longer than the first piece 1216b and the second piece 1216d penetrating up and down at the tip of the second piece 1216d and extending in the same direction as the second piece 1216d extends. It is provided with a long hole-shaped connecting hole 1216e into which the connecting pin 1214h of the start port door member 1214 is slidably inserted from below.

The first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 extends from the upper end of the main body 1216a in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216d extends at a right angle to the first piece 1216b in a plan view from below the first piece 1216b in the main body portion 1216a. The second piece 1216d is formed to have a length at which the tip is located near the center in the left-right direction of the lower case 1211 in a state where the main body portion 1216a is fitted into the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211.

As shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the variable starting port unit 1210 positions the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214 below the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. The start port solenoid 1215 is arranged horizontally on the upper side of the slider portion 1214g and on the rear side of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b, and further, the start port solenoid 1215 is further extended to the rear. On the lower side, the link member 1216 transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger 1215a to the start port door member 1214. As a result, the distance (magnitude) of the variable start port unit 1210 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. Therefore, the space on the rear side of the variable start port unit 1210 can be relatively widened.

In the variable starting port unit 1210 of the present embodiment, in a normal state (a state in which the starting port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the plunger 1215a of the starting port solenoid 1215 projects to the left due to the urging force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, as shown in FIG. 112, the engaging portion 1216c at the tip of the first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 is located on the left side of the center of the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211, and the first piece 1216b The connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending at a right angle to the clockwise direction is located behind the center of the support pin 1211e. The front end of the start port door member 1214 provided with the connecting pin 1214h inserted into the connecting hole 1216e of the link member 1216 substantially coincides with the front surface of the base plate 1160. That is, the start door member 1214 is in a state of being immersed (retracted) from the game area 1100 (a state of an unacceptable position). In this normal state, the detection unit 1214i of the start door member 1214 is detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

When the start port solenoid 1215 is energized according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134 of the center accessory 1130, the variable start port unit 1210 is in the right direction in which the plunger 1215a is immersed. (See FIG. 113). When the plunger 1215a of the starting port solenoid 1215 moves to the right and is immersed, the entire link member 1216 is viewed in a plan view centering on the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 by the engaging portion 1216c engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a. Rotate in the clockwise direction.

By rotating the link member 1216 in the clockwise direction, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d is rotated so as to move relatively forward, and is inserted into the connecting hole 1216e. The connecting pin 1214h of the starting door member 1214 is pushed forward by the inner surface of the connecting hole 1216e, and the starting door member 1214 slides forward as a whole. As a result, the front end of the starting door member 1214 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the front wall portion 1214d of the starting door member 1214 , And the standing wall portion 1214e are in a state of appearing in the game area 1100 (a state of an acceptable position). In the state where the start door member 1214 is slid forward to appear in the game area 1100, the detection unit 1214i of the start door member 1214 is not detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

When the game ball T flows down onto the first guide portion 1214a with the start door member 1214 appearing in the game area 1100, it rolls to the right due to the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a, and the second guide portion 1214b Sent up. Then, the game ball T sent to the second guide portion 1214b is further rolled to the right by the inclination of the second guide portion 1214b, and is moved to the third guide portion 1214c arranged on the right side of the second guide portion 1214b. Is sent.

Since the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, the game ball T sent to the third guide portion 1214c changes its rolling direction at the third guide portion 1214c to the rear. It is sent from the rear end of the third guide portion 1214c to the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 behind and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212. That is, the game ball T is received at the second starting port 1153. At this time, since the start opening door member 1214 is provided with a vertical wall portion 1214e having a height of about half the outer diameter of the game ball T at the right end of the third guide portion 1214c, the second guide portion 1214b The game ball T that has rolled to the third guide portion 1214c from the left side comes into contact with the standing wall portion 1214e, and is prevented from rolling to the right side of the third guide portion 1214c. Further, the game ball T that has been rolled from the left direction to the third guide portion 1214c can also be rolled backward by the guide piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161.

The game ball T discharged rearward from the third guide portion 1214c flows down onto the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 arranged below the third guide portion 1214c, and is guided to the ball guide portion 1211a. The ball guide portion 1211a enters the passage hole 1211b opened at the rear end, is detected by the ball detection sensor 1213, and is sent to the guide member 1170 for the second starting port.

[2-2C. Outline configuration of the accessory unit]
The accessory unit 1220 of the winning opening unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. The accessory unit 1220 includes an accessory winning opening 1155 that allows the game ball T to be accepted according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball T to the first starting port 1152 and the second starting port 1153. It is said that the game ball T received in the character winning opening unit 1220A and the character winning opening 1155 of the character winning opening unit 1220A can be distributed, and the V winning opening 1156 capable of accepting the game ball T by distribution is provided. It is equipped with a V winning opening unit 1220B.

[2-2C1. Character winning opening unit]
The accessory winning opening unit 1220A of the accessory unit 1220 supports the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 for opening / closing the accessory winning opening 1155 and the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and also provides the accessory winning opening. The upper housing 1222 that separates the left and right ends of the mouth 1155, the lower housing 1223 that is attached to the lower side of the upper housing 1222 and receives the game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155, and the lower housing 1223. It is equipped with a bonus opening sensor 1224 that detects the game ball T received in the cage winning slot 1155, and a plunger 1225a that is supported between the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 and moves forward and backward according to the game state. The accessory winning opening is detected by detecting the movement of the accessory winning solenoid 1225, the link member 1226 that slides the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 by transmitting the advance / retreat of the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225, and the accessory winning opening. It includes an open / close detection sensor 1227 that detects the open / close of 1155.

The accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A has a flat plate-shaped door portion 1221a that extends left and right with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is inclined so that the left side of the front view is low, and the door portion. It is provided with an extension piece 1221b extending rearward from the rear end of the center of the 1221a in the left-right direction, and a connecting hole 1221c extending vertically and horizontally near the front end of the extension piece 1221b. ..

The upper housing 1222 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A has a box-shaped upper housing main body 1222a in which the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is placed on the upper surface and the lower side is open, and front from the left and right ends at the front ends of the upper housing main body 1222a. A pair of flat plate-shaped compartment pieces 1222b protruding vertically and back and forth, and door portions 1221a left and right ends of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 formed on the left and right ends of the upper surface front portion of the upper housing body 1222a. A pair of groove-shaped first support portions 1222c that slidably support the upper housing body 1222c, and an opening 1222d that penetrates the upper housing body 1222a vertically and extends back and forth between the pair of first support portions 1222c. A pair of groove-shaped second support portions 1222e, which are formed on the upper rear portion of the upper housing body 1222a and slidably support the left and right ends of the extension piece 1221b in the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221, are provided. In the upper housing 1222, the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a and the upper surface of the pair of first support portions 122b coincide with each other.

The lower housing 1223 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A has a box shape with the upper side open, and extends to the left and right on the front side of the upper housing body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 with the same length as the distance between the pair of compartment pieces 1222b, and the bottom surface is A ball receiving portion 1223a that becomes lower toward the left and lowers toward the rear near the left end, a notch 1223b formed at the rear of the left end of the ball receiving portion 1223a and through which the game ball T can pass, and a notch 1223b. A shallow box-shaped accessory winning opening sensor 1224 that is formed on the rear and lower sides and has an open upper side, and the accessory that penetrates up and down through the bottom wall of the sensor support portion 1223c. The discharge port 1223d through which the game ball detected by the winning port sensor 1224 can pass, and the accessory winning solenoid 1225, which is formed on the right rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a and has an open upper side, is housed. The solenoid accommodating portion 1223e and the link accommodating portion 1223f formed on the left side of the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e (the center rear side in the left-right direction of the ball receiving portion 1223a) and rotatably accommodating the link member 1226 are provided. ..

The bonus winning solenoid 1225 of the bonus winning port unit 1220A is accommodated and supported in the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e of the lower housing 1223 so that the plunger 1225a advances and retreats from the front end side. The plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 is formed in the shape of a disk having a large diameter at the tip. The accessory winning solenoid 1225 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and the plunger 1225a is in a state of protruding (extending) due to the urging force of the coil spring when the power is not supplied.

The link member 1226 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A is rotatably supported by the bottom of the link accommodating portion 1223f of the lower housing 1223 and extends to the left and right, and the rotating shaft portion 1226a to the upper housing 1222. A strip-shaped paddle portion 1226b extending to the upper side of the upper surface of the upper housing body 1222a through the opening 1222d of the above, and a columnar shape extending to the left and right at the upper end of the paddle portion 1226b. The connecting portion 1226c inserted into the connecting hole 1221c of the opening / closing member 1221 from below and the connecting portion 1226c projecting to the right at a position downward from the center of the upper and lower sides of the paddle portion 1226b and engaging with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225. It is provided with an engaging portion 1226d, and a detection piece 1226e extending rearward from a position between the engaging portion 1226d and the rotating shaft portion 1226a in the paddle portion 1226b and detected by the open / close detection sensor 1227. ..

In the accessory winning port unit 1220A of the present embodiment, in a normal state (when not energized), the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 protrudes forward due to the urging force of the coil spring, and the tip of the plunger 1225a The engaging portion 126e of the link member 1226 that is engaged with the link member 1226 is in a state in which the paddle portion 1226b of the link member 1226 rises substantially vertically from the rotation shaft portion 1226a. In this state, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 having the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the paddle portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is inserted is pressed forward by the connecting portion 1226c via the connecting hole 1221c. Then, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is in a state of being slid forward.

As a result, the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 protrudes forward from the front end of the upper housing body 1222a in the upper housing 1222, and the front end of the door portion 1221a is substantially the same as the front end of the compartment piece 1222b of the upper housing 1222. It is a position. Further, the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 are in contact with the upper surfaces of the pair of compartment pieces 1222b separated from each other on the left and right sides of the upper housing 1222. Therefore, the accessory winning opening 1155 that opens upward is in a state of being closed by the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221, and the game ball T cannot be accepted (FIG. 124 (b). ) Etc.). In this state, the game ball T that has flowed down onto the door portion 1221a rolls to the left according to the door portion 1221a that is inclined so that the left side is lowered, and is discharged from the left end of the door portion 1221a to the left. Door. In the state where the accessory winning opening 1155 is closed by the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is in a state of being detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 1227.

When the prize winning solenoid unit 1220A is energized according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball T in the first starting port 1152 and the second starting port 1153, the plunger 1225a Move backwards to immerse. When the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 moves rearward, the engaging portion 126c of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a is pulled so as to move rearward. As a result, the link member 1226 rotates about the rotation shaft portion 1226a in the direction in which the upper end of the paddle portion 1226b moves rearward. Then, since the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the paddle portion 1226b moves rearward, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 slides rearward through the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c is inserted. ..

At this time, the engaging portion 1226d of the link member 1226 that is engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 is the length (height) of the paddle portion 1226b extending from the rotating shaft portion 1226a. Since it is arranged on the rotation shaft portion 1226a rather than the center, the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the paddle portion 1226b moves significantly backward with respect to the amount of movement backward of the plunger 1225a. Therefore, the front end of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) moves to the vicinity of the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 (near the rear end of the pair of compartment pieces 1222b), and the accessory winning opening 1155 It is opened upward and is ready to accept the game ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). In the state where the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened by the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is not detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 1227.

When the game ball T is accepted by the character winning opening 1155 when the character winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is retracted and the character winning opening 1155 is opened and ready to be accepted, the game ball T is moved up. It passes between the pair of compartment pieces 1222b of the housing 1222 and flows down onto the ball receiving portion 1223a of the lower housing 1223, and rolls to the left on the ball receiving portion 1223a due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 1223a. Then, it is discharged from the notch 1223b on the left rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a to the rear side, and is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 supported on the lower side on the rear side of the notch 1223b, and then the lower housing. It is discharged from the discharge port 1223d of 1223 onto the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guidance member 1238 described later of the V winning port unit 1220B below.

[2-2C2. V winning opening unit]
The V winning opening unit 1220B of the accessory unit 1220 is a unit front base 1230 and a unit front base 1230 which are attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 on the lower side of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A to form the V winning opening 1156. A V-winning solenoid 1232 having a unit rear base 1231 attached to the rear side, a plunger 1232a sandwiched between the unit front base 1230 and the unit rear base 1231 and advancing and retreating according to the game state, and a unit rear base 1231. A drive gear member 1233 that is rotatably supported by the unit front base 1230 on the rear side and rotates by advancing and retreating the plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232, a driven gear member 1234 that meshes with the drive gear member 1233, and a driven gear member 1234. A shaft member 1235 is provided with a rear end attached to the center of the unit, which is rotatably supported by the unit front base 1230 and whose front end projects forward from the unit front base 1230.

Further, the V winning opening unit 1220B is arranged in front of the unit front base 1230 and is attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235, and has a receiving portion 1236a on the peripheral surface capable of receiving only one game ball T. The columnar rotating body 1236, the disk-shaped rotating body front plate 1237 attached to the front surface of the rotating body 1236, and the unit front base 1230 attached to the front surface of the unit front base 1230 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, and won a prize. It is provided with a ball guiding member 1238 that guides the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 1223d of the mouth unit 1220A to the upper part of the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236 and guides the game ball T from the rotating body 1236 to the V winning port 1156. ..

Further, the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and is after the pair of V winning opening sensors 1239 for detecting the game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 and the unit front base 1230. The V loss sensor 1240, which is attached to the side and detects the game ball T that was not accepted by the V winning opening 1156 after being accepted by the accessory winning opening 1155, and the V loss sensor 1240, which is attached to the rear side of the unit rear base 1231 and rotates. It includes a rotation detection sensor 1241 that detects the rotation position of the body 1236.

The unit front base 1230 of the V winning opening unit 1220B has a flat surface extending vertically and horizontally, and the front portion 1230a through which the V winning opening 1156 penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view from the center and near the center of the front portion 1230a. It is provided with a bearing hole 1230b for rotatably supporting the shaft member 1235, and a loss hole 1230c for passing the game ball T through the front and rear on the upper side of the bearing hole 1230b. ..

Further, the unit front base 1230 is formed on the rear surface of the front portion 1230a, and guides the game ball T received by the V winning opening 1156i downward to the rear side of the first discharge path 1230d and the front portion 1230a. The second discharge passage 1230e, which is formed on the rear surface and guides the game ball T that has passed through the loss hole 1230c downward and the rear side is open, and the rear surface of the front portion 1230a are formed on the upper side of the first discharge passage 1230d. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating portion 1230f in which the cage V winning solenoid 1232 is accommodated. A pair of V winning opening sensors 1239 are installed in the first discharge path 1230d. Further, a V loss sensor 1240 is installed in the second discharge path 1230e. The open rear side of the first discharge passage 1230d, the second discharge passage 1230e, and the solenoid accommodating portion 1230f is closed by the unit rear base 1231.

The V winning solenoid 1232 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is housed in the solenoid accommodating portion 1230f of the unit front base 1230 so that the plunger 1232a advances and retreats from the lower end side. The plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 has a large-diameter disk-shaped tip. Further, the V winning solenoid 1232 includes a coil spring (not shown) that urges the plunger 1232a in a projecting direction, and the coil spring causes the plunger 1232a to project downward when the plunger is not energized.

The drive gear member 1233 of the V winning opening unit 1220B has a shaft portion 1233a that extends back and forth and is rotatably supported behind the unit front base 1230, and a flat plate shape that extends from the shaft portion 1233a in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The extension piece 1233b, the drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension piece 1233b and extending in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft portion 1233a, and the extension piece 1233b protruding forward from the front surface to win a V prize. It includes an engaging portion 1233d that engages with the tip of the plunger 1232a of the solenoid 1232.

The driven gear member 1234 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear end of the shaft member 1235, extends in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and has a driven gear 1234a that meshes with the drive gear of the drive gear member 1233. A detection piece 1234b extending from the rear surface of the driven gear 1234a in a direction perpendicular to the shaft core is provided. The pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a extending in an arc shape in the driven gear member 1234 is formed to be about 1/3 of the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c extending in an arc shape in the drive gear member 1233. There is.

The rotating body 1236 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is formed with a receiving portion 1236a capable of accommodating only one game ball T open to the front and the outer circumference. In the front view, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 has two sides (two sides separated in the circumferential direction) extending from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side extending in a direction away from each other toward the outer peripheral surface. Specifically, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is open upward, the left side of the front view with respect to the center line passing through the center of the rotating body 1236 and the center of the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. While the sides extend in parallel, the right side extends away from the bottom side toward the outer peripheral side (see FIG. 120 (a)). The radius of the rotating body 1236 is formed to be about 1.6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is formed from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom substantially equal to the outer diameter of the game ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). Further, in the receiving portion 1236a, the rear wall is notched from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side, and is formed lower than the two sides separated in the circumferential direction. Further, the receiving portion 1236a is provided with an inclined portion 1236b on the front side (inside) of the rear wall, which is inclined obliquely so as to face upward (away from the rotation axis). When the game ball T flowing down from above abuts on the inclined portion 1236b, the game ball T is guided forward so that it can be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a, and when receiving the game ball T, the receiving portion 1236a The impact acting on the bottom of the can be mitigated. Further, the open front end side of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is closed by the rotating body front plate 1237. As a result, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can move the game ball T in and out only from the radial outside of the rotating body 1236.

The ball guiding member 1238 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is formed by cutting out a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 1238a that covers the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and an upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a, and is an upper opening through which the game ball T can pass. The 1238b and the right side opening 1238c formed by notching the front view right portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a (position at an angle of 90 degrees in the front view clockwise with respect to the upper opening 1238b) through which the game ball can pass. The ball inlet 1238d, which is located above the peripheral wall portion 1238a and is located directly below the discharge port 1223d of the lower housing 1223 in the accessory winning opening unit 1220A and opens upward, and from the ball entrance 1238d toward the upper opening 1238b. The upper guide portion 1238e, which is lowered and bent like a crank to allow the game ball T to flow, and the game ball T, which is lowered from the right opening 1238c toward the V winning opening 1156 at the lower right of the front view, are lowered. It is provided with a right-hand guide portion 1238f that can be distributed.

The ball guide member 1238 has the upper guide portion 1238e and the right guide portion 1238f open at the rear end side, and when attached to the unit front base 1230, the rear end side opened by the front end portion 1230a is closed.

In the V winning opening unit 1220B of the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 is rotatably supported by the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly upward from the center of the top and bottom near the right end of the front view. On the other hand, the shaft member 1235 to which the driven gear member 1234 and the rotating body 1236 are attached is rotatably attached to the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly to the left of the center of the front view. Then, between the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 and the shaft member 1235, the drive gear 1233c of the drive gear member 1233 and the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 are meshed with each other, and the V winning solenoid 1232 is arranged. Has been done.

The V winning opening unit 1220B has a V winning opening 1156 opening forward at a position below the center of the rotating body 1236 and directly below the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233.

The V-winning solenoid 1232 is energized and de-energized at regular intervals under the control of the main control board 1113. When the V-winning solenoid 1232 is not energized, the plunger 1232a protrudes downward due to the urging force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the engaging portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 is pushed downward by the plunger 1232a protruding downward, and the drive gear member 1233 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view around the shaft portion 1233a to drive. The gear 1233c meshes with the vicinity of the front end clockwise end of the driven gear 1234 a in the driven gear member 1234 in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 120 (b)). At this time, the detection piece 1234b of the driven gear member 1234 is in a state of extending upward with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is in a state of being detected by the rotation detection sensor 1241.

Then, by the shaft member 1235 whose rear end side is attached to the driven gear member 1234, the rotating body 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 faces the open side of the receiving portion 1236a to the right in the front view. It is in the state of the release position. In this state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the right opening 1238c of the ball guiding member 1238, and the receiving portion 1236a and the right guiding portion 1238f are in a state of being built. Further, the upper opening 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238 is closed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236.

As a result, when the game ball is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game ball is guided from the receiving portion 1236a to the V winning opening 1156 through the right opening 1238c and the right guiding portion 1238f and received. The game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 is guided downward by the first discharge passage 1230d on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and is detected by the pair of V winning opening sensors 1239, and is detected by the first discharge passage 1230d. It is discharged downward from the lower end of.

On the other hand, the game ball T that has been received by the accessory winning opening 1155 of the accessory winning opening unit 120B and has reached the upper opening 1238b through the ball entrance 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238 and the upper guiding portion 1238e is the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236. The surface and the peripheral wall portion 1238a prevent the receiving portion 1236a from being received, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236 inclined so that the rear end side is narrowed opens to the rear side of the lower portion of the upper guiding portion 1238e. It enters the loss hole 1230c of the front portion 1230a of the unit front base 1230, is guided downward by the second discharge passage 1230e on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and is detected by the V loss sensor 1240, and is detected by the second discharge passage 1230e. It is discharged downward from the lower end of.

When the V winning solenoid 1232 is energized, the plunger 1232a rises so as to immerse against the urging force of the coil spring. As the plunger 1232a rises, the drive gear member 1233 is rotated clockwise around the shaft portion 1233a by the engaging portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 that is engaged with the tip (lower end) of the plunger 1232a. Move. When the drive gear member 1233 rotates clockwise, the driven gear member 1234 of the driven gear member 1234 meshing with the drive gear 1233c causes the entire driven gear member 1234 to rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise around the shaft member 1235. Rotate. As a result, the rotating body 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 also rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front via the shaft member 1235 attached to the driven gear member 1234 on the rear end side. Become.

Then, when the rotating body 1236 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise, the receiving portion 1236a is oriented so as to be opened upward, and the opening side of the receiving portion 1236a coincides with the upper opening 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238. It becomes a state. As a result, the receiving portion 1236a is in a state of communicating with the upper guiding portion 1238e via the upper opening 1238b (see FIG. 120A).

With the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 facing upward, the game ball is discharged from the accessory winning opening unit 1220A side, and when it enters the ball entrance 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, it passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e and is upper. It is received from the mouth 1238b to the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the game ball further enters the ball entrance 138b, the entering game ball T passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e and receives the rotating body 1236. After contacting the game ball T received by the unit 1236a from above, it enters the loss hole 1230c opened on the rear side and is discharged downward through the second discharge portion 130e of the unit front base 1230. To.

At this time, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is supported by the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a, and even if the game ball T abuts from above, it does not come off from the receiving portion 1236a. .. Further, the center of the upper opening 1238b (the center in the front-rear direction of the upper guidance portion 1238e) is formed so as to be slightly rearward with respect to the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. As a result, another game ball T coming from behind comes into contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a, so that another game ball T that has come into contact from above The game ball T can be guided to the rear where the loss hole 1230c is located, and another game ball T that comes later can be reliably discharged from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

[3-1. Game content]
The content of the game using the game ball T in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player operates the handle device 500, the game balls T stored in the plate unit 300 are driven one by one into the upper part of the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. The game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows down so as to pass through either the left or right side of the center accessory 1130, and is discharged from the out port 1112a opened at the lower end of the game area 1100. In the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails G, a windmill, a decorative body including a center accessory 1130, and the like are arranged, and when the game ball T comes into contact with the obstacle nail G and the like, the flow speed thereof is suppressed. At the same time, it is moved in various directions so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T.

Further, when the game ball T is accepted in the general winning opening 1151, the first starting opening 1152, the second starting opening 1153, the large winning opening 1154, the accessory winning opening 1155, etc., which are arranged in the game area 1100, it is accepted. A number of game balls T corresponding to the winning openings are paid out to the plate unit 300. The game ball T discharged from the out opening 1112a, the general winning opening 1151, the first starting opening 1152, the second starting opening 1153, the large winning opening 1154, and the accessory winning opening 1155 is not returned to the player.

When the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows down from the upper part of the center accessory 1130 to the left, it flows down between the center accessory 1130 and the guide wall 1111c in the game area 1100. Become. At this time, when the game ball T enters the warp entrance 1131 that is open on the left outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 1130, the game is played again from the warp outlet 1132 that is open at the lower center in the left-right direction of the center accessory 1130. Emitted into region 1100. Immediately below the warp outlet 1132, the first starting port 1152 of the winning port unit 1150 is always open upward, and the game ball T released from the warp outlet 1132 has an extremely high probability of being the first starting port. Accepted by 1152.

Further, even if the game ball T flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1130 does not enter the warp entrance 1131, the plurality of obstacle nails G move the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction under the center accessory 1130. Since it is gathered, it may be accepted by the first starting port 1152.

Then, when the game ball T is received by the first start port 1152, the game ball T is detected by the first start port sensor 1190, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 1113. The main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 by the detection signal from the first start port sensor 1190, and the payout control board 1101 controls the prize ball device 740 to respond to the received payout command. A number (for example, 3) of game balls T are paid out to the plate unit 300.

The game ball T that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 1130 and has not been received by the first starting port 1152 is discharged from the out port 1112a at the lower end of the game area 1100.

On the other hand, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows down from the upper part of the center accessory 1130 to the right, it enters the right flow path 1133 from the entrance 1133a of the center accessory 1130 and enters the game area. It is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 1133e arranged at substantially the center in the vertical direction of the 1100. Below the discharge port 1133e, the general winning port 1151 of the winning port unit 1150 is always open upward.

Then, when the game ball T is received in the general winning opening 1151, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 1113. The main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 by the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the payout control board 1101 controls the prize ball device 740 to respond to the received payout command. A number (for example, 10) of game balls T is paid out to the plate unit 300.

The game ball T that flows down the right side of the center accessory 1130 and is not accepted by the general winning opening 1151 passes through either the left or right side of the receiving portion 1161b in the front flow path forming member 1161 forming the general winning opening 1151. It flows down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 that closes the accessory winning opening 1155 of the object unit 1220. Then, the game ball T that has flowed down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a rolls the upper surface of the door portion 1221a to the left under the upper top wall portion 1161f of the accessory winning opening, and the accessory winning opening is from the left end of the door portion 1221a. It rolls to the upper surface of the left shelf portion 1161 g, and is discharged from the left end to the lower left of the left shelf portion 1161 g of the accessory winning opening.

Then, the game ball T released from the left shelf portion 1161g of the accessory winning opening flows down to the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, rolls the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j to the left, and the second (Ii) It is discharged from the left end of the start port upper shelf 1161j to the lower left. The game ball T released from the left end of the upper shelf portion 1161j of the second starting port abuts on the left standing wall portion 1161m of the second starting opening region on the left side thereof, and downwards along the right side of the left standing wall portion 1161m of the second starting opening region. Flow down to. The game ball T that has flowed down along the right side of the left standing wall portion 1161 m in the second starting port region flows down onto the lower shelf portion 1161i in the second starting port region, and the upper surface of the lower shelf portion 1161i in the second starting port region is left on the left side. After rolling to, it is discharged from the left end of the second starting port region lower shelf portion 1161i to the lower left so as to pass through the front surface of the large winning opening 1154.

When the game ball T flows down the right side of the center accessory 1130, the game ball T moves the gate member 1134 arranged in the gate space 1133c below the approach path 1133b in the right flow path 1133 of the center accessory 1130. Upon passing, it is detected by the gate sensor 1135 provided in the gate member 1134. Then, when the passage of the game ball T is detected by the gate sensor 1135, the main control board 1113 acquires an ordinary random number as a normal lottery result, collates the acquired ordinary random number with the ordinary symbol table, and the acquired ordinary random number wins. Judge whether or not. At this time, after the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the function display 1114, the result of the normal lottery is displayed. After that, when the normal lottery is a hit (“normal win”), the start port solenoid 1215 of the variable start port unit 1210 is energized for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 10 seconds). In the lottery of the ordinary lottery result, the probability that the "ordinary hit" is drawn is set to be higher than 1/2 (for example, 49/50 to 299/300).

When the start port solenoid 1215 is energized, the start port door member 1214 advances and passes through the second start port opening 1160c and the door slit 1160d of the base plate 1160, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, The third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e project forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160. When the game ball T is discharged to the left from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j in this state, the first guide of the starting opening door member 1214 comes into contact with the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161 m. It comes into contact with the portion 1214a, and the distribution direction is directed to the right by the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a. Then, the game ball T rolls from the first guide portion 1214a through the second guide portion 1214b to the third guide portion 1214c, and the inclination of the third guide portion 1214c and the guide piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161 The rolling direction is directed to the rear, and the second starting port 1153, which is open to the rear, is accepted.

When the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153 and detected by the second start port sensor 1191, the main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 by the detection signal, and the payout control board In 1101, the prize ball device 740 is controlled to pay out a number (for example, one) of game balls T corresponding to the received payout command to the plate unit 300.

The circumference of the second starting port 1153 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in more detail. As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123 and the like, the second starting port 1153 is open forward with a size that allows only one game ball T to be received. Immediately above the second starting port 1153, a shelf portion 1161j above the second starting port of the front flow path forming member 1161 is arranged. The upper shelf portion 1161j of the second starting port is approximately three times as long as the outer diameter of the game ball T and extends to the left and right so that the left end side is lowered, and the raised right end side is the second starting port. It is located directly above 1153. That is, the left end side of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j extends to the left side of the second starting port 1153. Further, the height difference between the right end side and the left end side of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the game ball T.

On the left outer side from the left end portion of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, a second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161 m extending vertically with a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T is arranged. The upper end of the second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m is located above the left end of the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance of about 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the lower end is located at the second starting opening. It extends vertically at a distance lower than the left end of the upper surface of the upper shelf portion 1161j by substantially the same distance as the outer diameter of the game ball T and above the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the start opening door member 1214.

The start port door member 1214 is located on the right side of the left standing wall portion 1161 m in the second start port region, and is spaced from the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j so that only one game ball T can be distributed. It is arranged below the upper shelf portion 1161j. The length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the start opening door member 1214 to the right end of the third guide portion 1214c (standing wall portion 1214e) is said to be about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

The second starting port 1153 is always open forward in the game area 1100. That is, it is possible to accept the game ball T regardless of the apparent game state. However, since the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged above the second starting port 1153, even if the game ball T flows down from the upper side, it is not accepted by the second starting port 1153. On the other hand, if the game ball T that has fallen to the lower shelf portion 1161i of the second starting port region arranged below the second starting port 1153 jumps up to the height of the second starting port 1153, it becomes the second starting port 1153. It may be accepted, but in reality it is rarely accepted. That is, the second starting port 1153 is arranged in the game area 1100 in an area where the game ball T is difficult to distribute.

As described above, the game ball T can be received by the start port door member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 projecting forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 to the second start port 1153. Since the start door member 1214 moves forward and backward, it is difficult to determine whether the start door member 1214 is moving forward or backward when viewed from the player (front) side. Therefore, by actually flowing the game ball T between the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m, the starting opening door member depends on whether or not it comes into contact with the starting opening door member 1214. It is necessary to recognize the advance and retreat of 1214, and the player is hit right so that the game ball T is distributed between the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161 m. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the game ball T, and to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball T and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Then, in a normal state (when the starting port solenoid 1215 is not energized), as shown in FIG. 123A and the like, the front end of the starting port door member 1214 does not protrude forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160. It has become. Therefore, in this state, even if the game ball T flows down between the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m, it does not come into contact with the starting opening door member 1214 and is on the lower side. It will flow down onto the lower shelf portion 1161i of the second starting port area arranged in.

Then, when the start port solenoid 1215 is energized according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134, the front end of the start port door member 1214 is in front of the front surface of the base plate 1160. Will protrude to.

In a state where the front end of the start port door member 1214 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 (a state in which the second start port 1153 can be accepted), the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start port region left standing wall portion When the game ball T flows down between the game ball T and 1161 m, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the first guide portion 1214a. Since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined so that the left end side is higher, the game ball T is guided to the right by this inclination. By the way, since the starting port door member 1214 is separated from the lower surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, the starting opening door member 1214 is left on the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. The game ball T that rolls in the direction, comes into contact with the left standing wall portion 1161 m of the second starting opening region from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, and then abuts on the first guide portion 1214a and is guided to the right. The movement of the door suddenly makes a U-turn and can strongly attract the player's attention (see FIGS. 122 (b) and 123 (b)).

Then, the game ball T guided to the right by the first guide portion 1214a rolls on the second guide portion 1214b on the right side thereof. Since the second guide portion 1214b has a smaller inclination angle from the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, the increase in the rolling speed of the game ball T is slower. The game ball T that has rolled the second guide portion 1214b to the right rolls to the third guide portion 1214c on the right side thereof. In the third guide portion 1214c, the bottom surface is lowered toward the rear, and the guide piece 1161l protruding to the left from the right side of the third guide portion 1214c toward the front is formed on the third guide portion 1214c. The game ball T is guided to the rear and is accepted by the second starting port 1153 which is open to the rear side.

Since the front plate portion 1161a of the front flow path forming member 1161 exists on the front side of the front end of the start opening door member 1214 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, the game ball T moves forward. It will not fall off (see FIG. 113 and the like).

When the energization of the start port solenoid 1215 is completed, the plunger 1215a immersed by the urging force of the coil spring provided in the start port solenoid 1215 protrudes, and the start port door member 1214 retracts via the link member 1216. As the start door member 1214 retracts, the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b protruding from the front surface of the base plate 1160 gradually decreases, and the front end of the start door member 1214 The gap between the front flow path forming member 1161 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a gradually increases.

Then, when the start port door member 1214 is retracted, the game ball T flows down between the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start opening region left standing wall portion 1161 m, or the first guide portion 1214a or the like. When the game ball T is rolling on the second guide portion 1214b, the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the like gradually decreases, so that the game ball T that is rolling to the right. Will not fall downward from the gap between the front end of the start port door member 1214 and the front plate portion 1161a and be received by the second start port 1153 before reaching the third guide portion 1214c (FIG. 123 (FIG. 123). c)).

As a result, when the energization of the start port solenoid 1215 is completed, the acceptance of the game ball T to the second start port 1153 can be immediately disabled, so that the extra reception of the game ball T is reduced. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. On the other hand, since the game ball T falls from the middle of the start port door member 1214, the player should have a sense of expectation for the opportunity that the second start port 1153 can be accepted next. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-2. Game state]
Next, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 126. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is mainly controlled to one of a "normal gaming state", a "short-time gaming state", and a "big hit gaming state".

In the "normal game state", when the game ball T fired in the left area of the game area 1100 by the player hitting the left side is accepted by the first start port 1152, the first special symbol determination (the above-mentioned special lottery) is performed. ) Is performed, and the determination symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed after the special symbol is variablely displayed on the function display 1114. This is a gaming state in which the game is executed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the lottery value determined to be a type 1 jackpot is defined as "1" and the lottery value determined to be a loss is defined as "199" in the first special symbol determination. There is a 1/200 chance that you will be a big hit. When it is determined by the first special symbol determination that it is a type 1 jackpot, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, and the jackpot game described later is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined as a type 1 jackpot in the first special symbol determination, there is a 10% probability of "suddenly a 1-class jackpot without a time-saving ball output" and a 40% probability of "a type 1 with a time-saving ball output". It becomes a "big hit", and there is a 50% chance that it will be a "one-class big hit with no time reduction and with a ball.

Here, the "suddenly shortened time-saving ball-less type 1 jackpot" is a type 1 jackpot in which the gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state after performing a round game in which the large winning opening 1154 is opened for a short period of time. The "type 1 jackpot with a time-saving ball output" is a type 1 jackpot in which the game state is set to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game in which the round game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened for a long period of time is performed a predetermined number of times is executed. "Type 1 jackpot with no time reduction and with payout" is a type 1 jackpot in which the game state is set to the normal game state after the jackpot game in which the round game in which the prize opening 1154 is opened for a long period of time is performed a predetermined number of times is executed.

In the "time-saving game state", when the game ball T launched into the right area of the game area 1100 by the player hitting the right side passes through the gate member 1134, the normal symbol determination (the above-mentioned normal lottery) is performed. The normal symbol determination is performed in the "short-time game state", and when the above-mentioned normal hit occurs, the second starting port 1153 is opened and the game ball T can be accepted.

When the game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153 while the game state is controlled to the "time saving game state", the second special symbol determination is performed, and the special symbol is variablely displayed on the function display 1114. Later, a game is executed in which the determination symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed.

If the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "big hit" (1 type big hit), there is a 70% probability of "1 type big hit with time reduction" and a 30% probability of "1 type with time reduction". It becomes a seed jackpot.

Here, "one-class big hit with a time-saving ball output" means that the game state is set to the time-saving game state after the big hit game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened for a long period of time is executed a predetermined number of times. It is a seed jackpot. "One-class jackpot with no time reduction and one-class jackpot" is a one-class jackpot in which the game state is set to the normal game state after the big hit game in which a round game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened for a long period of time is executed a predetermined number of times. .. In this way, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", the game state is set to the time-saving game state or the normal game state after the big hit game is performed without the small hit game being performed. ..

When a small hit is determined by the second special symbol determination in the "time saving game state", the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, and the accessory winning opening 1155 is temporarily opened. Then, when the game ball T is received from the accessory winning opening 1155 to the receiving portion 1236a during the small hit game, the game ball T is received by the V winning opening 1156, and becomes a two-kind big hit, which will be described later. A jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, when it becomes a small hit, the game ball T can be received from the accessory winning opening 1155 to the receiving portion 1236a by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. Then, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1246a is received by the V winning opening 1156 by rotating the rotating body 1236 from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right pointing position shown in FIG. 124 (b). It will be a big hit of 2 types.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the lottery value determined to be a type 1 big hit in the second special symbol determination is defined as "1", and the lottery value determined to be a small hit is defined as "198". , The lottery value determined to be lost is set to "1". As described above, since most of the determination results of the second special symbol determination executed on the condition that the game ball T is received at the second starting port 1153 are small hits, it is easy to be a two-kind big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball T is accepted into the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game, there is a 70% probability that the game will be a "two types of big hits with a time reduction" and a 30% probability of "time reduction". There are no balls and there are two types of big hits ”(see FIG. 126). Here, the "two-kind jackpot with a time-saving ball output" is a two-kind jackpot in which the game state is set to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, the "two-kind jackpot with no time reduction and with a ball output" is a two-kind jackpot in which the game state is set to the normal game state after the jackpot game is executed.

The "big hit game state" is a game state executed when the big hit symbol indicating that it is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the function display 1114, that is, when it is determined as the above-mentioned type 1 big hit, and the big prize is won. A game in which the mouth 1154 is opened is executed.

Further, during the above-mentioned small hit game, the V winning opening 1156 is temporarily opened, and during this time, the game ball T is accepted by the V winning opening 1156, so that two kinds of big hits are generated. Then, in this case as well, a game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened is executed as a big hit game.

In this way, when the big hit game is performed by receiving the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game, the game state is changed to the time-saving game state or the normal game at the end of the big hit game depending on the type of the small hit. Set to state.

Then, in the "time-saving game state", if a big hit does not occur even if the second special symbol determination is performed 100 times, the game state is returned from the "time-saving game state" to the "normal game state". Become. If the big hit does not occur even after the first special symbol determination is performed 100 times, the gaming state may be returned to the "normal gaming state". Further, if a big hit does not occur even if the total number of times of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is performed 100 times, it may be returned to the "normal game state".

[4. Processing by the main control board]
Next, the processing by the main control board 1113 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 141. The processing by the main control board 1113 proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed during the game.

[4-1. Timer interrupt processing by the main control board]
First, the timer interrupt processing executed on the main control board 1113 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 127. The main control board 1113 repeatedly executes the timer interrupt process at regular time intervals during normal operation except when the power is turned on or off.

First, the main control board 1113 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). ..

Here, the big hit random number is a random number for determining a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (see FIG. 126) when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The small hit symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of two types of big hits (see FIG. 126) that occurs when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game.

Further, the reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an effect with reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The ordinary symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 1153.

Next, the main control board 1113 executes the detection process when the detection signals from each sensor are input (step S2). This detection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131.

Next, the main control board 1113 executes a special symbol determination, causes the function display 1114 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then performs a special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the determination symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination. Execute (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

Next, the main control board 1113 performs normal symbol processing including a process of executing a normal symbol determination, causing the function display 1114 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Execute (step S4). This ordinary symbol processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 136.

Next, when the main control board 1113 determines that the second starting port 1153 is to be opened as a result of performing the normal symbol determination, the starting port door member 1214 is slid to receive the game ball T into the second starting port 1153. Execute the start door processing to enable (step S5). This start door processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

Next, when the main control board 1113 determines that it is a small hit in the special symbol processing in step S3, the accessory winning opening 1155 is temporarily opened by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. When the game ball T is received from the accessory winning opening 1155 to the receiving portion 1236a, the open rotation control process is executed so that the game ball T can be received in the V winning opening 1156 by rotating the rotating body 1236 (step). S6). The open rotation control means will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, when the main control board 1113 determines in step S3 that it is a big hit, or when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game, the big winning opening 1154 is opened. The mouth opening control process is executed (step S7). The large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Next, the main control board 1113 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize balls according to the winning of the game ball T (step S8).

Then, the main control board 1113 surrounds information necessary for determining various commands and effect contents stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM of the main control board 1113, not shown) in the processing steps prior to step S8. The transmission process of transmitting to the control board 1116 is executed (step S9).

[4-2. Detection processing by the main control board]
Next, the detection process in step S2 of FIG. 127 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 128. The main control board 1113 first monitors the presence or absence of input of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 1190, and various random numbers (big hit random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, etc.) that are appropriately updated by the process of step S1. And the fluctuation pattern random number), the first start port detection process for acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 1190 is input is executed (step S21). The first start port detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Next, the main control board 1113 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the second start port sensor 1191, and various random numbers (big hit random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, small hits) that are appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The second start port detection process for acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the second start port sensor 1191 is input is executed for the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number (step S22). The second starting port detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

Then, the main control board 1113 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135, and when the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is input for the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The gate detection process for acquiring the value of is executed (step S23). This gate detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

[4-3. First start port detection process by the main control board]
Next, the first start port detection process in step S21 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 129. First, the main control board 1113 receives a detection signal (a signal indicating that the game ball T has been received in the first start port 1152) from the first start port sensor 1190, following the random number update process in step S1. Based on whether or not the first start port sensor 1190 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T, it is determined (step S211).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the first start port sensor 1190 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S211: YES), the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is determined. It is determined whether or not the number of reservations is less than the maximum number of reservations of 4 for the first special symbol determination stored in the storage area (ROM of the main control board 1113, not shown) in advance (step S212).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of holdings is less than the maximum number of holdings 4 (step S212: YES), "1" is added to the value of the number of holdings (step S213).

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the first start port sensor 1190 has not detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S211: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the maximum number of holds is 4. (Step S212: NO) ends the first start port detection process.

Next, the main control board 1113 acquires the jackpot random number (step S214), the jackpot symbol random number (step S215), and the reach random number (step S216) as the acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination. A variation pattern random number is acquired (step S217), and the acquired random number is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113.

Then, the main control board 1113 sets a hold command in the RAM of the main control board 1113 to notify that the first special symbol determination is held (step S218). This hold command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9. When the hold command is set, the main control board 113 ends the first start port detection process.

[4-4. Second start port detection process by the main control board]
Next, the second start port detection process in step S22 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 130. First, the main control board 1113 starts the second start based on whether or not a detection signal (a signal indicating that the game ball T has been accepted at the second start port 1153) is input from the second start port sensor 1191. It is determined whether or not the mouth sensor 1191 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S221).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the second start port sensor 1191 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S221: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to ". Based on whether or not it is set to "ON", it is determined whether or not a big hit game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened is in progress (step S222). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game.

When the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit game is not in progress (step S222: NO), whether or not the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON". Based on the above, it is determined whether or not a small hit game in which the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened is in progress (step S223). This small hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit game that opens the prize winning opening 1155 is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the small hit game, and the end of the small hit game. Sometimes set to "OFF".

When the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is not in progress (step S223: NO), the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S224). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S224: NO), the jackpot random number is acquired (step S225), the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step S226), and the small hit symbol is acquired. A random number is acquired (step S227), a reach random number is acquired (step S228), and a variation pattern random number is acquired (step S229). When the main control board 113 acquires these random numbers, the main control board 113 ends the second start port detection process.

In the present embodiment, in the process in step S227, the opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the accessory winning opening 1155 is determined by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 based on the small hit symbol random number. The determined opening / closing pattern is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 together with the small hit symbol random number, and is further transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 in the transmission process of step S9.

If it is determined that the second start port sensor 1191 has not detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S221: NO), or if it is determined that the big hit game is in progress (step S222: YES), the small hit game is in progress. If it is determined that the above is true (step S223: YES), and if it is determined that the special symbol is changing (step S224: YES), the second start port detection process is terminated.

[4-5. Gate detection processing by the main control board]
Next, the gate detection process in step S23 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 131. First, the main control board 1118 passes the game ball T through the gate sensor 1135 based on whether or not a detection signal (a signal indicating that the game ball T has passed through the gate member 1134) is input from the gate sensor 1135. Is determined (step S231).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the gate sensor 1135 has detected the passage of the game ball T (step S231: YES), the number of reserved normal symbol determinations stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is determined. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reservations is less than 4 (step S232).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of holdings is less than the maximum number of holdings 4 (step S232: YES), "1" is added to the value of the number of holdings (step S233). Then, the reserved ordinary symbol random number used for the ordinary symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S234). The main control board 113 ends the gate detection process when it acquires a normal symbol random number.

When the main control board 1113 determines that the gate sensor 1135 has not detected the passage of the game ball T (step S231: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the maximum number of reservations is 4. (Step S232: NO), the gate detection process is terminated.

[4-6. Special symbol processing by the main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 1113 will be described in detail. First, the main control board 1113 is in the big hit game or in the small hit game based on whether or not the big hit game flag or the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON". It is determined whether or not it is (step S301).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit game is in progress or the small hit game is in progress (step S301: YES), the main control board 1113 determines that the special symbol processing is completed but not in the big hit game or the small hit game. If so (step S301: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S313, while when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (step S302: YES). Step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not various random numbers of the second starting port winnings related to the acceptance of the game ball T in the second starting port 1153 are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S303). ).

Specifically, various random numbers acquired when the game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153 are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113, and various random numbers related to the second starting port winning are stored. Since a flag indicating that the data has been stored is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113, it is stored based on whether or not this flag is stored when various random numbers are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. It is determined whether the various random numbers are related to the second starting port winning or the first starting opening winning related to the acceptance of the game ball T in the first starting port 1152.

When the main control board 1113 determines that the random number related to the second start port winning is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S303: YES), the main control board 1113 moves to the process of step S307, while the second When it is determined that the random number related to the start opening winning is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S303: NO), the number of pending first special symbol determinations stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. Is determined to be "1" or more (step S304).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of holds is not "1" or more (step S304: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the special symbol processing, while determines that the number of holds is "1" or more. (Step S304: YES), the number of holds is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S305).

Next, the main control board 1113 executes the shift process of the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S306). Specifically, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number related to the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 are first stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. The (oldest) one is shifted to a specific storage area of the RAM of the main control board 1113.

Next, the main control board 1113 executes the jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S307). In detail, by executing this big hit determination process, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and the determination symbol information indicating the determination result is set. Then, when it is determined that it is a big hit (type 1 big hit), the type of big hit is determined, and when it is determined that it is a small hit, the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game. With this as an opportunity, the types of two types of jackpots that occur are determined. This jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

Next, the main control board 1113 executes the variation pattern setting process (step S308). Specifically, with reference to the variation pattern table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113, the determination result of the jackpot determination in step S307, the type of the set determination symbol, and the current gaming state. , The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the pending number of the first special symbol determination, the reach random number and the variation pattern random number stored together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S307. By the process of step S308, it is determined whether to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. This fluctuation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134.

Next, the main control board 1113 is related to the symbol setting information set in the process of step S307, the symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol determination, or is related to the second special symbol determination. Fluctuation start command including information indicating whether or not, setting information of the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S308, information indicating whether to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach, information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. Is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S309). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9.

The peripheral control board 1116 identifies the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 1113, and determines whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. , The fluctuation time in which the special symbol is variablely displayed is acquired, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is specified. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 1115, the pattern to be displayed (displaying the decorative symbol) and the like are determined, and the effect of the determined content is executed.

Next, the main control board 1113 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S309 (step S310). The variation display of this special symbol is performed on the function display 1114 in a predetermined mode.

Next, the main control board 1113 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display in step S310 (step S313).

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the process of step S308 has elapsed since the measurement of the fluctuation time in step S311 has started (step S313). .. When it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S313: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the special symbol fluctuation processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S313: YES), the main control board 1113 notifies the function display 1114 that the special symbol determination result is displayed in a manner indicating the determination result. Is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S314). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9. As a result, a process of stopping and displaying the symbol (decorative symbol) that has been variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Next, the main control board 1113 ends the variation display of the special symbol started in the process of step S310 (step S315). At that time, the determination symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S307 is stopped and displayed on the function display 1114 which has been variable-displayed in a predetermined mode.

Then, the main control board 1113 resets the fluctuation time that started measurement in the process of step S311 (step S316), starts the big hit game when it is a big hit, and starts the small hit game when it is a small hit. A game process including the process is executed (step S317). When the game processing is completed, the main control board 113 ends the special symbol processing. The game processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 135.

[4-7. Big hit judgment processing by the main control board]
Next, the jackpot determination process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 133. First, the main control board 1113 executes a jackpot determination (step S3071). Specifically, when executing the jackpot determination related to the second starting opening winning, the jackpot determination table for the second starting opening winning (not shown) is referred to, and the jackpot determination related to the first starting opening winning is executed. In that case, refer to the jackpot judgment table for winning the first starting port (not shown).

The main control board 1113 determines whether or not it is a type 1 jackpot based on the determination result in step S3071 (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a type 1 jackpot (step S3072: YES), the type of jackpot is referred to in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113 for determining the symbol at the time of the jackpot (not shown). (Step S3073), and a jackpot symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S3073 is set (step S3074). As a result, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, and the jackpot game is executed. When this process is completed, the jackpot determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the result of the special symbol determination is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3072: NO), the flag related to the second special symbol determination is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. It is determined whether or not this special symbol determination is the first special symbol determination related to the first start opening winning (step S3075).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the first special symbol determination is made (step S3075: YES), the determination result is a loss, so the lost symbol is set as setting information (step S3076). As a result, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like. When the lost symbol is set, the main control board 1113 ends the jackpot determination process.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that it is not the first special symbol determination (step S3075: NO), it determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is a small hit (step S3077). Specifically, whether or not the big hit random number stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the random number value corresponding to the small hit specified in the big hit determination table for winning the second starting port (not shown). Based on the above, it is determined whether the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit or a loss.

When the main control board 1113 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit (step S3077: NO), the process shifts to step S3076. On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S3077: YES), the symbol at the time of the small hit stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. The type of small hit is determined with reference to the determination table (not shown) (step S3078). Specifically, the type of small hit is based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of small hit matches the small hit symbol random number stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. To determine.

Next, the main control board 1113 sets the setting information of the determined small hit symbol (step S3079). As a result, the set small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like.

[4-8. Fluctuation pattern setting process by the main control board]
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 134. First, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the determination result of the special symbol determination is a type 1 jackpot (step S3081). When the main control board 1113 determines that it is a type 1 jackpot (step S3081: YES), the fluctuation pattern table for the jackpot is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3082). When the variable pattern table for big hits is set on the main control board 1113, the process proceeds to step S3808.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not a type 1 big hit (step S3081: NO), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (step S3083). When the main control board 1113 determines that it is a small hit (step S3083: YES), the fluctuation pattern table for the small hit is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3084). When the fluctuation pattern table for small hits is set on the main control board 1113, the process proceeds to step S3808.

On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that it is not a small hit (step S3083: NO), that is, if it is a loss, it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect for the player to expect a big hit. Determine (step S3085). Specifically, whether or not the reach effect is performed based on whether or not the reach random number stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the reach random number stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. Is determined.

When the main control board 1113 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3085: YES), the main control board 1113 reads out the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and sets it in the RAM (step S3086) to perform the reach effect. When it is determined that the above is not performed (step S3085: NO), the fluctuation pattern table for loss is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3087). When the main control board 1113 sets the variation pattern for reach or loss, the process proceeds to the process of step S3088.

Next, the main control board 1113 determines the variation pattern random number using the variation pattern table set in the processes of step S3082, step S3084, step S3086, or step S3087 (step S3088). Specifically, the variation pattern table (not shown) stored in advance in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is referred to, and the variation pattern corresponding to the stored variation pattern random number is selected. By this processing, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined.

Then, when the fluctuation pattern is selected, the main control board 1113 sets the selected fluctuation pattern in the RAM of the main control board 1113 as setting information (step S3089). The variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command set in the process of step S309 together with the symbol set by the jackpot determination process, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. When the fluctuation pattern is set, the main control board 1113 ends the fluctuation pattern setting process.

[4-9. Game processing by the main control board]
Next, the game processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 135. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not it is a type 1 jackpot (step S3171). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a type 1 jackpot (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" (step S3173). This time-saving game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is the time-saving game state, and is set to "ON" when shifting from the normal game state to the time-saving game state, and from the time-saving game state. It is set to "OFF" when returning to the normal gaming state.

When the main control board 1113 determines that the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3173: NO), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S3183, while the time saving game flag is set to "ON". If it is determined that this is the case (step S3173: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3174). When the time saving game flag is set to "OFF", the main control board 1113 moves to the process of step S318.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3171: NO), whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON". (Step S3176). When the main control board 1113 determines that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), the time saving game remaining number of times stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "1". It is updated to the subtracted value (step S3177). The time-saving game remaining number of times indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the time-saving game state, and when the time-saving game remaining number of times becomes "0", the game state is changed. It will be returned from the time-saving game state to the normal game state.

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the time-saving game remaining number of times stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is "0" (step S3178). When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of remaining time-saving games is "0" (step S3178: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). As a result, the gaming state is returned from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the time saving game flag is not "ON" (step S3176: NO), or when it determines that the time saving game remaining number is not "0" (step S3178: NO). ), The process proceeds to step S3108.

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not it is a small hit (step S3180). When the main control board 1113 determines that it is not a small hit (step S3108: NO), it ends the game process, while it determines that it is a small hit (step S3180: YES), it is a small hit. The game flag is set to "ON" (step S3181).

Then, the main control board 1113 sets the start command in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S3183). Here, the start command is the period from the start of the big hit game to the first opening of the big winning opening 1154, or from the start of the small hit game to the first opening of the accessory winning opening 1155. It is a command for notifying the period of, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. When the opening command is set, the main control board 1113 ends the game processing.

[4-10. Ordinary pattern processing by the main control board]
Next, the ordinary symbol processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 136. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" (step S401). This auxiliary game flag is a flag indicating whether or not an auxiliary game is being performed in which an operation that enables the game ball T to be accepted into the second start port 1153 by sliding the start port door member 1214 is performed a predetermined number of times. It is set to "ON" during the game, and is set to "OFF" when the auxiliary game is not in progress. When the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S401: YES), the main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol processing.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary game flag is not set to "ON" (step S401: NO), the function display 1114 determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined (step S402) and it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S402: NO), the number of reserved normal symbol determinations stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is "1" or more. It is determined whether or not there is (step S403).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of reservations is not "1" or more (step S403: NO), it determines that the number of reservations is "1" or more while ending the normal symbol processing. (Step S403: YES), the number of pending numbers is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S404), and the hit random number determination process is executed (step S405). Specifically, the oldest ordinary symbol random number among the ordinary symbol random numbers stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is one of the winning values related to the ordinary symbol determination stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. Based on whether or not they match, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit.

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S406), and if it is determined to be a hit (step S406: YES), the function display 1114. Set the hit symbol to be stopped and displayed as the determination symbol in (step S407). On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S406: NO), the main control board 1113 sets the lost symbol (step S408).

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal gaming state (step S409). Then, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol fluctuation time for displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner on the function display 1114 is set to 25 seconds (step S410). ..

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S409: NO), the normal symbol variation time is set to 2 seconds (step S411). The normal symbol fluctuation time set in this way is temporarily stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113.

Next, the main control board 1113 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by the function display 1114 (step S412), and starts the measurement of the elapsed time from the start of the variation display (step S413). The main control board 1113 usually ends the symbol processing when the measurement of the elapsed time is started.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the normal symbol by the function display 1114 is in the variable display (step S402: YES), the main control board 1113 determines whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbol (step). S415). Specifically, whether or not to end the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on whether or not the elapsed time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S413 reaches the normal symbol fluctuation time set in step S410 or step S411. Is determined.

When the main control board 1113 determines that the variation display of the normal symbol is not terminated (step S415: NO), the main control board 1113 terminates the normal symbol processing, while it determines that the variation display of the normal symbol is terminated. (Step S415: YES), the variable display of the normal symbol on the function display 1114 is terminated, and the hit symbol set in the process of step S407 or the lost symbol set in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416). ).

Next, the main control board 1113 resets the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in the process of step S413 (step S417). Then, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S418).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S418: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination is a hit while ending the normal symbol processing. If so (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S419). When the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON", the main control board 1113 usually ends the symbol processing.

[4-11. Start door door processing by main control board]
Next, the start door processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 137. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" (step S501). When the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary game flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the start door door processing.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the start door member 1214 is operating (step S501: YES). Step S502). When the main control board 1113 determines that the start door member 1214 is in operation (step S502: YES), the main control board 1113 moves to the process of step S507.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the start door member 1214 is not in operation (step S502: NO), it determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503). ). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503: YES), the main control board 1113 opens the second starting port 1153 for 0.1 seconds as an operation pattern of the starting port door member 1214. The operation pattern for performing the operation once is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S504).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S503: NO), the main control board 1113 is in the time-saving gaming state, so that the second start is performed as the operation pattern of the start door member 1214. An operation pattern in which the operation of opening the mouth 1153 for 0.3 seconds is performed five times is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S505).

Next, the main control board 1113 sets the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, and then causes the start door member 1214 to start the operation according to the set operation pattern (step S506).

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the started operation of the start door member 1214 is completed (step S507). When the main control board 1113 determines that the operation of the started start door member 1214 has not been completed (step S507NO), the main control board 1113 ends the start door door process.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the operation of the start door member 1214 is completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to "OFF" (step S508). When the auxiliary game flag is set to "OFF", the main control board 1113 ends the start door processing.

[4-12. Open rotation control processing by the main control board]
Next, the open rotation control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" (step S601).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the open rotation control process. On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), the elapsed time from setting the command in the process of step S3183 is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the small hit game is starting based on whether or not the set time has been reached (step S602). When the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is starting (step S602: YES), it determines whether or not the start time has elapsed (step S603). Here, if it is determined that the start time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the open rotation control process ends.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the start time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the number of winnings of the game ball T to the accessory winning opening 1155 stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. Is reset (step S604), and the opening control for opening the accessory winning opening 1155 is started by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (step S605).

To open the accessory winning opening 1155, the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 based on the opening / closing pattern set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 in the process of step S227. ..

Next, the main control board 1113 starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the opening control (step S606). When the main control board 1113 starts measuring the elapsed time, the process proceeds to the process of step S611.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is not starting (step S602: NO), it determines whether or not the small hit game is ending (step S608). When the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is being completed (step S608: YES), the process shifts to step S625.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is not being completed (step S608: NO), the detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 (the game ball T is sent to the accessory winning opening 1155). It is determined whether or not the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T based on the presence or absence of the input of the signal indicating that the game ball T has been accepted (step S609). When the main control board 1113 determines that the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 has not detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S609: NO), the process proceeds to the process of step S611.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S609: YES), it is determined that one game ball T has won a prize in the accessory winning opening 1155. The number of winnings of the game ball T stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S610).

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the elapsed time at which measurement is started in the process of step S606 coincides with a preset set time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (step S611). When the main control board 1113 determines that the set time does not match (step S611: NO), the process shifts to step S612, while when it determines that the set time matches (step S611: YES), The process of rotating the rotating body 1236 to allow the game ball T to be accepted by the V winning opening 1156 is started (step S612).

Specifically, the main control board 1113 receives from the accessory winning opening 1155 by performing a process of rotating the rotating body 1236 from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right direction position shown in FIG. 124 (b). The game ball T received in the unit 1236a can be received in the V winning opening 1156.

Next, the main control board 1113 uses the V winning opening sensor 1239 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal (a signal indicating that the game ball T has been accepted in the V winning opening 1156) from the V winning opening sensor 1239. It is determined whether or not the acceptance of the game ball T is detected (step S613).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the V winning opening sensor 1239 has not detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S613: NO), the process proceeds to the process of step S616, while the V winning opening sensor 1239 When it is determined that the acceptance of the game ball T has been detected (step S613: YES), the V winning flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" (step S614). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball T has won the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game and two kinds of big hits have occurred, and the game ball T has won the V winning opening 1156. In the absence state, it is set to "OFF", and when the game ball T wins in the V winning opening 1156, it is set to "ON".

Next, the main control board 1113 sets a V winning command in the RAM of the main control board 1113 to notify that the game ball T has won a prize in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game (step S615). This V winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9.

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 1156 (step S616). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed since the rotating body 1236 was rotated.

When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not the closing timing (step S616: NO), the process shifts to step S620, while when it is determined that the closing timing is not reached (step S616: YES), the main control board 1113 rotates. The body 1236 is rotated to close the V winning opening 1156 (step S317). Specifically, the V winning opening 1156 is closed by rotating the rotating body 1236 from the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b) to the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a).

Next, the main control board 1113 opens the specified opening operation of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (for example, the accessory winning opening 1155 for 3.2 seconds) based on the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of step S606. It is determined whether or not one operation) has been completed (step S620).

When it is determined that the specified opening operation is completed (step S620: YES), the main control board 1113 shifts the process to step S622, while when it is determined that the specified opening operation is not completed (step S620: YES). S620: NO), the number of winning game balls T to the character winning opening 1155 in this small hit game matches the number of game balls "6" that defines the closing timing of the character winning opening 1155 stored in advance. It is determined whether or not to do so (step S621).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of winnings does not match "6" (step S621: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the number of winnings matches "6" while ending the open rotation control process. In the case (step S621: YES), the opening control of the accessory winning opening 1155 started in the process of step S605 is ended (step S622), and the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of step S606 is reset (step S623). ), The measurement of the small hit end time is started (step S624). Here, the small hit end time means the period from the end of opening of the accessory winning opening 1155 to the end of the small hit game.

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the small hit end time has elapsed based on whether or not the time when the measurement is started in the process of step S624 reaches the preset small hit end time. (Step S625). When the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (step S625: NO), the open rotation control process ends, while the preset small hit end time has elapsed. If it is determined (step S625: YES), the small hit game flag is set to "OFF" to end the small hit game (step S626), and the small hit end command notifying the end of the small hit game is issued. It is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S627). This small hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9.

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S628). When the main control board 1113 determines that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S628: NO), it determines that the game ball T has not won the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game. Then, while ending the open rotation control process, if it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S628: YES), the V winning flag is set to "OFF" (step). S629), the big hit game flag is set to "ON" (step S630), and the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S631) in order to start the big hit game following the small hit game.

[4-13. Large prize opening control process by the main control board]
Next, the large winning opening opening control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 140. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" (step S701). When the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S701: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the jackpot opening control process.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S701: YES), the main control board 1113 sets the start command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3183. Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is starting (step S702).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot game is starting (step S702: YES), whether or not the start time has elapsed based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined start time. (Step S703). When it is determined that the start time has not elapsed (step S703: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the large winning opening opening control process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start time has elapsed (step S703: YES), the main control board 1113 determines the number of rounds of the big hit game, the operation pattern of the big winning opening 1154, and the like, and mainly uses this information. It is stored in the RAM of the control board 1113 (step S704). By the process of step S704, various times related to the jackpot game such as the interval time between the rounds and the end time (ending time) after the end of the final round are also set.

Next, the main control board 1113 resets the number of winnings of the game ball T to the big winning opening 1154 stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S705), and the round during the big hit stored in the RAM. The number is updated to the value obtained by adding "1" (step S706). This number of rounds is set to "0" before the start of the big hit, and "1" is added each time the process of step S706 is performed.

Next, the main control board 1113 starts the opening control of the large winning opening 1154 (step S707), and starts measuring the opening time which is the elapsed time from the start of the opening control (step S708). Then, a round start command for notifying that the round game has started is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S709). When the round start command is set, the main control board 1113 shifts the process to step S716.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot has not started (step S702: NO), it determines at what point in the jackpot game the current state stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is. Based on the information shown, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being completed immediately after the end of the final round (step S711). When the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot is being completed (step S711: YES), the process shifts to step S725.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot is not finished (step S711: NO), the main control board 1113 makes a round based on the information indicating which time in the jackpot game the current stored state is. It is determined whether or not it is in the middle (between the round and the next round) (step S712).

If the main control board 1113 determines that it is in the middle of a round (step S712: YES), it is between the rounds set by the process of step S704 after the large winning opening 1154 is closed at the end of the previous round. It is determined whether or not the time has passed (step S713).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the time between rounds has elapsed (step S713: YES), it is time to start the next round, so the process proceeds to step S705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time between rounds has not elapsed (step S713: NO), the large winning opening opening control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not in the middle of the round (step S712: NO), it is determined that the main control board 1113 is in the round, and the detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 1206 (game to the large winning opening 1154) Based on the presence or absence of the input of the signal indicating that the ball T has been accepted, it is determined whether or not the game ball T has been accepted in the grand prize opening 1154 (step S714).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the game ball T has not been accepted in the large winning opening 1154 (step S714: NO), the process shifts to step S716, while the game ball T is moved to the large winning opening 1154. If it is determined that acceptance has been detected (step S714: YES), the number of winnings of the game ball T is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S715).

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed from the opening start of the large winning opening 1154 (step S716). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S708 reaches the predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) stored in advance.

When the main control board 1113 determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S716: YES), the process shifts to step S718, while when it is determined that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S716: YES). S716: NO), the number of winnings of the game ball T in this round stored in the RAM of the main control board 11113 defines the closing timing of the large winning opening 1154 stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches “9” (step S717). Here, if it is determined that the number of winnings does not match "9" (step S717: NO), the large winning opening opening control process ends.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the number of winnings matches "9" (step S717: YES), the main control board 1113 ends the opening control of the large winning opening 1154 (step S718).

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the current number of rounds of the jackpot game stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the number of rounds set by the process of step S704 (step). S719).

When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of rounds does not match the set number of rounds (step S719: NO), the large winning opening 1154 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. The measurement of the time between rounds, which is the elapsed time from, is started (step S720). The time between rounds at which measurement was started by the process of step S720 is used for the process of step S713. When the main control board 1113 starts measuring the time between rounds, the large winning opening opening control process ends.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the number of rounds matches the predetermined number of rounds (step S719: YES), the main control board 1113 starts measuring the end time (step S722) and resets the stored number of rounds. Then, the jackpot end command is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S724). This jackpot end command is a command for notifying that the final opening of the jackpot 1154 has been completed, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9.

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed (step S725). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end time for which the measurement is started by the process of step S722 has reached the jackpot end time set by the process of step S704. When it is determined that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (step S725: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the jackpot opening control process.

On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (step S725: YES), the main control board 1113 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 after the jackpot game ends (step S725: YES). S726). Then, in order to end the jackpot game, the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF" (step S727). When the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF", the main control board 1113 ends the jackpot opening control process.

[4-14. Game state setting process by the main control board]
Next, the game state setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 141. First, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the current big hit game is a big hit game following the small hit game (step S7261). Specifically, when the big hit game is performed following the small hit game, the big hit game flag is set to "ON" in the process of step S630, and when it is not the big hit game following the small hit game, step S3172 is performed. Since the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" in the process, whether or not this jackpot game follows the small hit game is determined based on which process the jackpot flag is set to "ON". judge.

When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not a big hit game following the small hit game (step S7261: NO), the big hit symbol (RAM of the main control board 1113) is stopped and displayed on the function display 1114 at the start of the big hit game. Based on the jackpot symbol setting information stored in (step S7262), it is determined whether or not there is a time reduction after the jackpot game is completed (step S7262). When the main control board 1113 determines whether or not there is a reduction in working hours after the end of the big hit game, the process shifts to step S7264.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game follows the small hit game (step S7261: YES), the small hit symbol (the stored small hit symbol) stopped and displayed on the function display 1114 at the start of the small hit game. Based on the setting information), it is determined whether or not there is a time reduction after the jackpot game is completed (step S7263).

Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not there is a reduction in working hours after the end of the big hit game (step S7264). When the main control board 1113 determines that there is no time reduction (step S7264: NO), the process shifts to step S7267. On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that there is a time reduction (step S7264: YES), the time reduction game flag is set to "ON" (step S7265), and the time reduction game remaining number is set to "100" (step S7264: YES). Step S7266). As a result, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state in which the second start port 1153 is easily opened from the end of the big hit game to the execution of 100 special symbol determinations. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no time reduction (step S7264: NO), the processes of step S7265 and step S7266 are not performed, so that it is difficult to open the second starting port 1153 after the jackpot game is completed. The game is controlled in the normal game state.

Then, the main control board 1113 sets a game state command for notifying the peripheral control board 1116 of the game state after the end of the big hit game in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S7267). This game state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9. When the game state command is set in the RAM of the main control board, the main control board 1113 ends the large winning opening opening control process.

[5. Characteristic effects of the first embodiment of the present invention]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 is performed according to the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100. (According to the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the ball T), when the character winning opening 1155 becomes acceptable, if the game ball T is accepted into the character winning opening 1155, benefits such as payout of the game ball T are given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the character winning opening 1155, entertaining the driving operation of the game ball T and suppressing the deterioration of the interest. can do. Since the game medium can be accepted by the character winning opening 1155 according to the game state, the acceptance of the game ball T into the character winning opening 1155 is limited, so that the character winning opening 1155 is used. It is possible to reduce the granting of benefits due to the acceptance of the game ball T, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is sent to the upper opening 1238b side opened in the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236, and when the game ball T reaches the upper opening 1238b, the rotating body T. When the receiving portion 1236a of the 1236 is located at the accommodating position facing upward, the game ball T is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, and the rotating body 1236 rotates and receives in that state. When the portion 1236a rotates to the discharge position facing to the right, the game ball T is received from the receiving portion 1236a through the right portion opening 1238c into the V winning opening 1156, which is a privilege different from the accessory winning opening 1155 (big hit game). ) Will be granted, and the player can be entertained by the granted privilege, and the privilege will be granted when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 via the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Therefore, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is housed in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, and the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 can be excited. It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of T and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

When the plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 is moved back and forth, the rotation of the rotating body 1236 causes the entire drive gear member 1233 to be a shaft portion by the engaging portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 that is engaged with the tip of the plunger 1232a. The driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234, which rotates around 1233a and meshes with the drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension portion 1233b of the drive gear member 1233, rotates in the direction opposite to that of the drive gear member 1233. It is moved so that the rotating body 1236 rotates between the accommodating position and the releasing position as the driven gear member 1234 rotates. As a result, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 becomes faster than in the case where the rotating body 1236 is rotated by a motor as in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can attach the game ball T to the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Even if an attempt is made to take the timing of driving the game ball T so that the ball T is accommodated, it is possible to make it difficult to take the timing. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T to be accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T to be accepted into the V winning opening 1156. It is possible to suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side by reducing the grant.

Further, since the pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a is smaller than the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c, the rotation angle of the driven gear 1234a (rotating body 1236) should be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the drive gear 1233c. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased as compared with the case where the drive gear 1233c and the driven gear 1234a have the same pitch diameter. Therefore, since the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 becomes high, even if the player tries to take the driving timing of the game ball T so that the game ball T is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the timing is taken. It can be difficult.

Further, since the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is provided on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b with a loss hole 1230c for discharging the game ball T that has been distributed from the accessory winning opening 1155 to the rotating body 1236 when the receiving portion 1236a is not in the accommodation position. , It is possible to prevent the game ball T from staying between the rotating body 1236 and the accessory winning opening 1155. Therefore, even if the game ball T is invaded into the accessory winning opening 1155 by some fraudulent act, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is not in the accommodating position, the game ball T is illegally accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to prevent the privilege from being illegally given without being done, and to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the fraudulent act. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the normal state where the accessory winning opening 1155 is unacceptable, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 rotates to the V winning opening 1156 side that coincides with the right portion opening 1238c. Therefore, even if an illegal game ball T is invaded into the accessory winning opening 1155, it can be recognized at a glance that the game ball T cannot be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, which is illegal. It is possible to hesitate to act and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, as described above, since the rotating body 1236 rotates faster than before, even if it is considered that the game ball T is illegally received by the V winning opening 1156 (the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236), the rotating body T rotates faster. By showing the moving rotating body 1236, it is possible to make the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 recognize that it is difficult to receive the illegal game ball T at first glance, and to discourage the illegal activity and perform the illegal activity. It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against. Moreover, since fraudulent acts can be prevented, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, since the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236 is covered with the peripheral wall portion 1238a, the game ball T housed in the receiving portion 1236a when the receiving portion 1236a opened to the outer peripheral side is rotated from the accommodating position to the discharging position. Even if centrifugal force due to rotation acts on, the outer peripheral side of the receiving portion 1236a is closed by the peripheral wall portion 1238a between the accommodating position and the releasing position, so that the game ball T is moved from the receiving portion 1236a by the centrifugal force. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from popping out, and the game ball T can be reliably moved to the release position. Further, since the peripheral wall portion 1238a can prevent the game ball T from popping out from the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 that is rotating, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 can be further increased and the rotating body 1236 can be rotated. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 which makes it difficult to take the timing of the body 1236 and surely achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 is changed according to the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100. (According to the result of the special lottery drawn by the acceptance of) The accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A can move, and the accessory winning opening 1155 can accept the game ball T. In this state, when the game ball T is accepted into the character winning opening 1155, benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls T are given. Therefore, the game ball T aiming at the character winning opening 1155 is given to the player. It is possible to entertain by performing the driving operation of. When the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 aiming at the character winning opening 1155 is accepted by the character winning opening 1155, a privilege is given, and the player is further entertained by the given privilege. Can be done. The game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is guided through the upper guiding portion 1238e of the V winning opening unit 1220B to the upper opening 1238b formed on the upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236. , Will come into contact with the rotating body 1236 via the upper opening 1238b. At this time, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the upper opening 1238b, the game ball T passing through the upper opening 1238b is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Then, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a rotates together with the receiving portion 1236a while being received by the receiving portion 1236a as the rotating body 1236 rotates, and when the receiving portion 1236a coincides with the right portion opening 1238c, From the receiving portion 1236a, it enters the right guiding portion 1238f through the right opening 1238c, is guided by the right guiding portion 1238f and is accepted by the V winning opening 1156, and a privilege such as a big hit game is given, and the privilege given is given. It is possible to further entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Since this rotating body 1236 is provided with only one receiving portion 1236a, it is not guided to the V winning opening 1156 as compared with the case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions as in a conventional pachinko machine. Since there is no receiving portion 1236a, it is a pachinko machine 1 that makes it easy for beginners and players who are unfamiliar with the driving operation of the game ball T to aim at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 at first glance. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be played, and it is possible to enjoy the game with the pachinko machine 1 and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. can do.

Further, since only one receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T of the rotating body 1236 is provided, the rotating body 1236 has a plurality of receiving portions as compared with the conventional case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions. The outer diameter can be reduced, it becomes possible to easily secure a space for arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100, the degree of freedom of arranging the rotating body 1236 is increased, and the rotating body 1236 is placed in an effective place. Can be placed. At this time, since the rotating body 1236 is rotated around the axis extending back and forth, the circular end face of the rotating body 1236 faces forward (player side), and the outer diameter of the rotating body 1236 is adjusted. Even if it is made smaller than the conventional one, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 (receiving portion 1236a) from becoming difficult to see, and it is possible to entertain the game by the rotating body 1236 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is sized so that only the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 1236 can be opened to receive only one game ball T, and the second discharge path 1230e is located behind the upper opening 1238b. Since the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is aligned with the upper opening 1238b, the game ball T that has flowed down through the upper opening 1238b is surely received by the receiving portion 1236a because it is provided with a loss hole 1230c that communicates with. Even if another game ball T comes into contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a from above, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a comes into contact with another game ball T. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from falling off from the receiving portion 1236a due to the impact, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a can be reliably sent to the V winning opening 1156 side by the rotation of the rotating body 1236.

Further, since the upper guide portion 1238e and the loss hole 1230c communicating with the second discharge passage 1230e are provided on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 does not match the upper opening 1238b. Even if the game ball T flows down from the accessory winning opening 1155 side and comes into contact with the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236 via the upper opening 1238b, it can be discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear side loss hole 1230c. .. On the other hand, while the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the upper opening 1238b and the game ball T has already been received by the receiving portion 1236a, another game ball T flows down from the accessory winning opening 1155 side. Even if the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a via the upper opening 1238b is brought into contact with the game ball T from above, another game ball T coming later is discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the loss hole 1230c on the rear side. can do. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls T are received in the accessory winning opening 1155, only one game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, and the remaining game balls T are discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls T from being accepted by the V winning opening 1156 in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It should be noted that one of the plurality of game balls T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and is received in the V winning opening 1156 to give a privilege, so that the rotating body 1236 is given. Even if there is a game ball T that is not received by the receiving portion 1236a and is discharged from the loss hole 1230c, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Can be done.

Further, since the game ball T that was not received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is discharged from the loss hole 1230c to the rear side of the rotating body 1236, the game that was not received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Compared with the case where the sphere T is discharged through at least one of the left and right sides of the rotating body 1236, the size of the front view of the V winning opening unit 1220B provided with the rotating body 1236 can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100 is high, the rotating body 1236 can be arranged in an effective place in the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be easily seen from the player side. It is possible to entertain the game by the rotating body 1236 and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the center of the upper opening 1238b is formed so as to be slightly behind the center of receiving the game ball T of the receiving portion 1236a in the rotating body 1236, and is formed so as to be slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. Since another game ball T that came later comes into contact with the position slightly rearward, the upper mouth is passed through the upper guide portion 1238e in a state where the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When another game ball T from 1238b comes into contact with the game ball T received from above by the receiving portion 1236a, the other game ball T that has come into contact from above is guided to the rear where the loss hole 1230c is located. Then, another game ball T that comes later can be reliably discharged downward from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

Further, since another game ball T coming later comes into contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game received by the receiving portion 1236a. A force that pushes the ball T forward on the side opposite to the loss hole 1230c acts on the ball T, so that the ball T is hard to fall off to the loss hole 1230c side, and the state received by the receiving portion 1236a can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 falls off and there is no chance of being received by the V winning opening 1156. The game ball T received by the receiving unit 1236a can be surely received by the V winning opening 1156, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the rotating body 1236 is provided with an inclined portion 1236b on the front side (inside) of the wall on the rear side of the receiving portion 1236a, which is inclined obliquely so as to move upward (away from the center of rotation) and backward. At the same time, by forming the center of the upper opening 1238b slightly behind the center of receiving the game ball T of the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T flowing down through the upper opening 1238b comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b. Therefore, when the game ball T flows down from the upper opening 1238b while the game ball T is not received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236, and the game ball T is brought into contact with the inclined portion 1236b. Can be guided forward so that it can be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T first comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b and comes into contact with the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, so that the impact acting on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a is alleviated. It is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 from being damaged, and it is possible to attenuate the flow speed of the game ball T and bring it into contact with the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. Therefore, the game can be played at the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The ball T can be made difficult to bounce, and the game ball T can be reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a.

Further, since the upper guide portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, the circulation speed of the game ball T guided by the upper guide portion 1238e can be reduced. Therefore, even if another game ball T that has circulated the upper guide portion 1238e comes into contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the distribution speed is increased by circulating the upper guide portion 1238e. Is attenuated, so that the impact due to contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is reduced, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a jumps up from the receiving portion 1236a. It can be made difficult, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a can be made difficult to fall off from the receiving portion 1236a.

Further, since the upper guide portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape and the circulation speed of the game ball T can be reduced by the upper guide portion 1238e, the game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is upwardly guided. Even if the portion 1238e is circulated and comes into contact (contact) with the rotating body 1236 (including the receiving portion 1236a) from the upper opening 1238b, the impact acting on the rotating body 1236 can be reduced, and the contact of the game ball T. It is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 from being easily damaged by the impact caused by the above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being frustrated and deteriorating the interest in the game due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the rotating body 1236, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. Can be done.

Further, in order for the game ball T to be received by the V winning opening 1156 via the rotating body 1236, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 must be opened so that the accessory winning opening 1155 can be accepted. It is possible to limit the opportunity for the ball T to be accepted into the V winning opening 1156 (character winning opening 1155), and it is possible to give a premium feeling to the V winning opening 1156 and the like. Therefore, if the bonus opening 1155 can be accepted according to the game state, the V winning opening 1156 has an opportunity to accept the game ball T. Therefore, the accessory winning opening 1155, the rotating body 1236, and the V winning opening 1156 are obtained. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the above, raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156, and drive the game ball T aiming at the character winning opening 1155 to the player. The operation can be positively performed, and the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variable start port unit 1210, the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 arranged on the right end side by extending left and right with the slider portion 1214 g of the start port door member 1214. After making the heights of the possible first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, and third guide portion 1214c different, the slider portion 1214g of the start opening door member 1214 on the left side of the second start opening 1153. A starting port solenoid 1215 is attached to the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward on the opposite side of the second starting port 1153 from the upper side and the rear side of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b. , A lottery is drawn when the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134 according to the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the link member 1216 below the start port solenoid 1215. The advancing and retreating of the movable plunger 1215a (according to the result of the ordinary lottery) is transmitted to the starting door member 1214 slidably supported by the lower case 1211 so that the starting door member 1214 can be slid back and forth. Therefore, the front-rear and vertical dimensions of the mechanism for sliding the start-door door member 1214 (variable start-up unit 1210) can be made smaller than those of the conventional one. Therefore, the installation space for providing the variable start port unit 1210 having the start port door member 1214 that slides back and forth according to the game state can be reduced, so that the start door that slides back and forth in the game area 1100 can be reduced. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the member 1214, and by arranging the start door member 1214 in a place where it could not be arranged by the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to greatly change the atmosphere in the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player who strongly attracts the interest of the player and wants to select it as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, as described above, the installation space for providing the variable start port unit 1210 can be reduced, and even if the variable start port unit 1210 having the start port door member 1214 is provided, the decorative body, the movable decorative body, and the like. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the other members without pressing the other members such as the accessory, so that the decoration effect and the effect of the other members can be fully exerted. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, the second starting port 1153 is arranged on the right end side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion extending to the left and right of the start port door member 1214 are arranged. Since the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 by 1214c, when the start port door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the first guide of the start port door member 1214 When the game ball T flows down on the portion 1214a, the game ball T rolls to the right on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c and is received by the second starting port 1153. As a result, the game ball T rolls toward the second start port 1153 on the first guide unit 1214a, the second guide unit 1214b, and the third guide unit 1214c, so that the player moves to the second start port 1153. It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. At this time, when the start opening door member 1214 that slides back and forth slides forward, the game ball T is guided to the second start opening 1153 by the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. Since the action of the start door member 1214 is opposite to that of the variable inlet (variable winning opening) of the conventional pachinko machine, it can give a strong impact to players who are accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal.

Further, the first guide is in a state where the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c of the start door member 1214 are slid forward and protrude into the game area 1100 according to the game state. When the game ball T flows down on the portion 1214a, the game ball T can be guided to the right end portion side, so that the game ball T rolls on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c extending to the left and right. The movement of the moving game ball T can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T rolling on the first guide unit 1214a, the second guide unit 1214b, and the third guide unit 1214c. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, when the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 is moved back and forth according to the game state, the engaging portion 1216c of the link member 1216 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a moves left and right as the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward. It revolves around an axis that extends vertically around the main body 1216a so as to move, and the main body 1216a also extends vertically via the first piece 1216b that connects the engaging portion 1216c and the main body 1216a. It will rotate around the axis. The connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending from the main body 1216a at a right angle to the first piece 1216b is fitted and connected to the connecting pin 1214h protruding from the slider portion 1214g of the starting door member 1214. Therefore, the rotation of the main body portion 1216a causes the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d to revolve around the axis extending vertically, and the revolving of the connecting hole 1216e causes the connecting pin 1214h and the slider portion 1214g to revolve. The start door member 1214 slides back and forth. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 capable of transmitting the advancement and retreat of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 to reliably slide the start port door member 1214 back and forth and exerting the above-mentioned effects and effects is surely realized. be able to.

Further, the second piece 1216d of the link member 1216 has a length extending to the slider portion 1214g on the lower side of the start port solenoid 1215 in the start port door member 1214, which is shorter than the conventional one, and therefore is relatively shorter than the conventional start port door member. The front and rear slide range of 1214 can be narrowed, and the front and rear dimensions can be made smaller than before. Further, since the link member 1216 is rotated around the vertically extending axis, the vertical dimension is smaller than the case where the link member 1216 is rotated around the vertically extending axis as in the conventional case. can do. Therefore, the mechanism for sliding the start door member 1214 back and forth (variable start port unit 1210) can be made smaller than before, and the pachinko machine 1 that surely achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized. it can.

Further, since the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 can be discharged downward from the lower side of the lower case 1211 via the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 A passage member for receiving the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 is provided on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 as compared with the case where the game ball T is guided to the rear side and released. It is not necessary, and it is possible to easily secure a space on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members such as a decorative body, a movable decorative body, and an accessory on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, that is, the rear side of the variable starting port unit 1210. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game area 1100, even when the start port door member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 is in an unacceptable position retracted rearward, the second start port 1153 is inside the game area 1100. Since the second starting port 1153 is not closed while it is always open, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball T can be accepted into the second starting port 1153. The interest of the person can be strongly attracted to the second starting port 1153. Therefore, since the second starting port 1153 is always open, the player can be made to pay attention to the second starting port 1153 regardless of the movement (slide) of the starting port door member 1214. On the other hand, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 and to make it hard to get bored, and to the player regardless of the position of the starting port door member 1214, the second starting port 1153 It is possible to perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the start door member 1214 is slid back and forth, regardless of the position of the start door member 1214, which is the acceptable position protruding forward or the unacceptable position retracted backward. Since it looks the same when viewed from the front, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the position of the start door member 1214. Therefore, since the position of the start door member 1214 is difficult to know, the player can be made to think that the start door member 1214 is in an acceptable position protruding forward, and the player aims at the start door member 1214. It is possible to entertain by performing a driving operation of the game ball T.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to reduce the extra acceptance of the game ball T, a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the extra acceptance of the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 is drawn. It is possible to prevent the game from being played, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player flows down above the second start port 1153, the second start port 1153 flows forward. Since the path forming member 1161 is arranged below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j prevents the game ball T from being directly accepted into the second starting port 1153. , It will be discharged downward from the left end portion of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j. At this time, the start opening door member 1214 extending to the left and right according to the game state (in response to the passage of the game ball T at the gate member 1134) that changes as the game ball T is driven into the game area 100 The game ball T released downward from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j in a state of sliding forward and protruding into the game area 1100 is the second starting port in the plan view of the starting port door member 1214. When it flows down to the left outer portion of the upper shelf portion 1161j, the game ball T rolls on the starting port door member 1214 in the direction of the second starting port 1153 and is received by the second starting port 1153. Then, when the game ball T is accepted at the second starting port 1153, benefits such as payout of the game ball T and lottery of the special lottery result are given, so that the player can be entertained by the given benefits. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start port door member 1214 so that the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153.

The start port door member 1214 extending to the left and right slides in a front-rear direction different from the acceptable direction of the game ball T facing left in the second start port 1153, and the start port is within the game area 1100. When the game ball T flows down on the start door member 1214 when the door member 1214 is slid from the protruding state to the non-protruding state (immersed state), the game ball T is flat on the start door member 1214. Since it takes some time from the left outer side of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j to the second starting port 1153 visually, until the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting door member 1214. If the start door member 1214 retracts and immerses in the meantime, the game ball T will not be accepted by the second start door 1153 and will fall from the start door member 1214. More specifically, while the game ball T is rolling to the right toward the second start port 1153, the start door member 1214 retracts so that the upper surface of the start door member 1214 on which the game ball T rests is placed. It gradually becomes smaller, and before the game ball T reaches the second starting port 1153, it falls off from the starting port door member 1214. Therefore, since it is possible to reduce the extra reception of the game ball T by the second starting port 1153, it is unnecessary to receive the game ball T by the extra second starting port 1153 (particularly, it is a privilege (particularly). It is possible to reduce the granting of a special lottery result lottery in which an advantageous game state occurs), and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

If the game ball T flows down onto the start door member 1214 while the start door member 1214 is sliding forward so as to project into the game area 1100, the start door member 1214 causes the game ball T to move forward. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the second starting port 1153 and accepted. However, since the start door member 1214 slides according to the gaming state, it is difficult to know when the start door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100, and the start door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100. After confirming that the start door member 1214 is projected, the player performs a driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, so that the start door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100. The possibility that the game ball T will flow down onto the start door member 1214 is reduced, and the increase in the load on the game hall side is suppressed.

Further, since the start opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the game ball T flows down on the start opening door member 1214, it acts on the start opening door member 1214 due to the contact of the game ball T. A drive mechanism (starting port solenoid 1215) that slides the starting port door member 1214 only by the impact acting on the slide groove 1211d in the lower case 1211 of the variable starting port unit 1210 that slidably supports the starting port door member 1214. And the link member 1216), and the start port door member 1214 and the like (variable start port unit 1210) can be made difficult to be damaged.

Further, since the start door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the length (distance) of sliding the start door member 1214 is shorter than that in the case where the start door member 1214 is slid left and right. can do. Therefore, since it is possible to shorten the time from the state in which the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 until it is retracted and immersed, the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 by the start door member 1214. The start port door member 1214 can be immersed in the start port door member 1214, and the game ball T can be made difficult to be received by the second start port 1153. Further, since the start door member 214 is slid in the front-rear direction, a space for immersing the start door member 1214 and a mechanism for sliding the start door member 1214 are arranged on the rear side of the game area 1100. The inside of the game area 1100 is not pressed by the mechanism for sliding the start door member 1214 (start port solenoid 1215, link member 1216, etc.), and the inside of the game area 1100 can be used as widely as possible. Can be done.

Further, since the upper surface of the second guide portion 1214b adjacent to the second starting port 1153 in the starting door member 1214 is formed flat without protrusions, the starting door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100. Even if the game ball T flows down on the start door member 1214 when the game ball T is slid back so as to be immersed from the state of being immersive, the game ball T is pulled toward the rear end side of the game area 1100 by the protrusion and the start door The game ball T can be smoothly dropped from the start door member 1214 without being difficult to fall from the member 1214 or the game ball T jumping toward the second start port 1153 due to the protrusion. It is possible to surely produce the desired action and effect.

Further, the game ball T can be received from the left side with respect to the second start port 1153, and the game ball T guided from the left side by the start port door member 1214 extending to the left and right enters the second start port 1153 as it is. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that when the game ball T is guided to the start port door member 1214, it is surely accepted by the second start port 1153. Therefore, when the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, it is possible to make it think that if the game ball T is allowed to flow down the start door member 1214, it will always be accepted by the second start door 1153. Therefore, it is possible to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the start port door member 1214 is slid back and forth by projecting or immersing the start port door member 1214 into the game area 1100 by advancing and retreating the plunger 1215a which is movable by energizing the start port solenoid 1215, the start port door member 1214 The sliding speed of the start door member 1214 can be increased with a simple configuration as compared with the case where the motor is used to slide the start door member 1214. Therefore, since the start door member 1214 can be slid quickly, the start door member 1214 is moved to the game area 1100 until the game ball T on the start door member 1214 is guided to the second start door 1153. It is possible to retract from the inside, it is possible to surely reduce the acceptance of the excess game ball T into the second starting port 1153, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T is drawn by passing through the gate member 1134 as a game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 110 by the operation of the player. When the start port door member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the result of the ordinary lottery, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 is the first of the front flow path forming member 1161. When it flows down to the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, it rolls to the left by the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, and when it is released from the left end side, it flows down by the second starting port area left standing wall 1161m. Abuts on the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 located below between the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, and is left along the starting opening door member 1214. By being guided to the right on the opposite side of the above, it will be distributed in a U-turn shape and will be accepted by the second starting port 1153. Then, when the game ball T is accepted at the second starting port 1153, the game ball T is paid out and the special lottery result is drawn as a privilege. Therefore, the privilege can entertain the player and the game ball. It is possible to enjoy the driving operation (right-handed) of the game ball T aiming at the upper shelf portion 1161j of the second starting port so that the T is received by the second starting port 1153. At this time, the starting port door member 1214 was bent diagonally to the left end portion away from the second starting opening 1153 below between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161 m. Since the first guide portion 1214a is provided, it is apparent to the player that when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a, the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 side. It can be recognized, and the expectation for accepting the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 can be increased. Further, in the starting port door member 1214, the first guide portion 1214a far from the second starting port 1153 and the second guide portion 1214b near the second starting port 1153 have different inclination angles, and the first guide portion Since the acceleration of the game ball T is high in 1214a and the acceleration of the game ball T is slow in the second guide portion 1214b, the rolling speed of the game ball T changes depending on the portion where the game ball T rolls. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the rolling speed of the game ball T, which has not changed on the start door member, changes, so that the player can be surprised and give a strong impact, and the player will not get bored. At the same time, the movement of the game ball T can be entertained by the player, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered. Further, as described above, since the rolling speed of the game ball T changes between the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b of the starting door member 1214, the game ball T rolls on the starting door member 1214. It is possible to strongly attract the player's attention to the playing game ball T, and by paying attention to the game ball T rolling on the starting door member 1214, the starting door member 1214 It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T at the second starting port 1153 to which the game ball T is guided.

Further, the first guide portion 1214a is tilted at an angle of 40 to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and when the game ball T comes into contact with the first guide portion 1214a of the start door member 1214 from above, it is likened to Even if the game ball T is reflected by the first guide portion 1214a, since it moves along the first guide portion 1214a, it becomes possible to distribute the game ball T along the start opening door member 1214 extending to the left and right. , The game ball T can be made to move as intended on the start door member 1214, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved. Further, since the first guide portion 1214a is tilted at an angle of 40 to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the game ball T hits the first guide portion 1214a of the start door member 1214 from above. When they come into contact with each other, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the game ball T in contact with the first guide portion 1214a is reflected to the right side where the second starting port 1153 is located. Correspondingly, when the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the player recognizes that if the game ball T is allowed to flow down to the first guide portion 1214a, the game ball T can be received by the second start port 1153. Can be made to. Therefore, when the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the player positively drives the game ball T aiming at the first guide portion 1214a of the start door member 1214. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in a plan view are formed within a range of 0.2 to 1 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the game ball T is formed by the first guide portion 1214a. Can be reliably guided to the second starting port 1153 side, and the rolling speed of the guided game ball T can be suppressed from becoming faster than necessary to make it easier to see the rolling game ball T. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game medium and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the left and right lengths of the start door member 1214 in a plan view are formed within a range of 2 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a of the start door member 1214 The game ball T that rolls on the start door member 1214 toward the second start port 1153 side can be appropriately shown to the player in just proportion, and the movement of the game ball T with impact can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the movement of the game ball T and suppressing the player's interest from being lowered.

Further, when the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, when the game ball T is guided by the front flow path forming member 1161 provided in the game area 1100, the start door door Since the game ball T flows down to the left end side of the member 1214 away from the second starting port 1153, that is, to the first guide portion 1214a side, the game ball T is moved to the first guide portion 1214a of the starting door member 1214. Can flow down (contact). Therefore, since the game ball T can be rolled over substantially the entire left and right sides of the start door member 1214, the movement of the game ball T by the start door member 1214 provided with the first guide portion 1214a is given to the player. It can be shown reliably, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged directly above the starting opening door member 1214 so that the game ball T is distributed in a U-turn shape, the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged in the starting opening door member 1214. The start door member 1214 and the first door member 1214 in the game area 1100 are compared with the case where the game ball T is arranged at a position on the left outer side of the first guide portion 1214a directly above the first guide portion 1214a so that the game ball T is distributed in a crank shape. (Ii) The space occupied by the start port upper shelf portion 1161j and the like in the left-right direction can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the start door member 1214 and the like can be increased, the start door member 1214 and the like can be arranged in a place easily visible to the player in the game area 1100, and the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. The playing pachinko machine 1 can be surely embodied.

Further, when the start port door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second start port area standing wall portion 1161 m extends vertically to the left outer side of the first guide portion 1214a. , The game ball T released from the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is brought into contact with the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m before flowing down onto the starting opening door member 1214, and is left of the first guide portion 1214a. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from flowing down to the outside, and the game ball T can be surely flowed down onto the starting port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the first (Ii) When the game ball T that has flowed down between the left standing wall portion 1161 m of the starting port region abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a) and bounces, the game ball T is formed by the left standing wall portion 1161 m of the second starting port region. Can be reliably prevented from flowing to the side opposite to the second starting port 1153 side, and the game ball T can be reliably guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player flows down to the upper side of the second starting port 1153 which is open toward the front, the second Immediately above the starting port 1153, it comes into contact with the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, and the second starting port upper shelf 1161j rolls from the position directly above the second starting port 1153 to the left according to the inclination of the upper surface. At the start port upper shelf portion 1161j, it is discharged from the left end portion side away from the second start port 1153 and comes into contact with the second start port region left standing wall portion 1161 m. At this time, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, so that the start opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100. Then, the game ball T released from the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and abutting on the second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 and is brought into contact with the starting opening door member 1214. (2) The guide is guided to the front side of the start port 1153 and is received by the second start port 1153. At this time, since the second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161k extending vertically is provided on the right outer side of the second starting port 1153 on the same side as the side where the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is raised. Even if the game ball T guided in the direction of the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214 tries to pass the front side of the second starting port 1153, it abuts on the right standing wall portion 1161k of the second starting port region and passes by. The game ball T guided by the start port door member 1214 is accepted into the second start port 1153. When the game ball T is accepted at the second starting port 1153, benefits such as payout of the game ball T and lottery of the special lottery result are given, and the given benefits can entertain the player. , The driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the second starting port 1153 can be enjoyed so that the game ball T is received by the second starting port 1153. Then, before the game ball T is received by the second starting port 1153, the game ball T comes into contact with the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, the second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161 m, and the starting port door member 1214. As a result, the movement of the game ball T, which makes a U-turn and the distribution direction suddenly changes, can entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, when the start opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 and the game ball T flows down onto the second start opening upper shelf 1161j, the game ball T makes a U-turn as described above. Therefore, the distribution speed of the game ball T is relatively slowed down by changing the distribution direction of the game ball T by 180 degrees. Therefore, since the movement of the game ball T distributed in a U-turn can be easily seen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball T, and the movement of the game ball T is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T circulates in a U-turn shape, and when the start door member 1214 does not protrude into the game area 1100, the game ball T Will circulate in an inverted L shape, so even if the game ball T is allowed to flow down to the same second start port upper shelf 1161j according to the protrusion of the start door member 1214, the movement of the game ball T will be different. be able to. Therefore, since the movement (flow) of the game ball T changes according to the game state (according to the passage of the gate member 1134 by the game ball T), the player is shown the game ball T of various movements. It can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and losing the interest of the player.

Further, only one game ball T can be circulated between the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 arranged vertically, and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the starting opening are provided. Since the vertical distance from the door member 1214 is made as narrow as possible, the game ball T that comes into contact with the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 1161 m and flows onto the starting opening door member 1214. Since the movement of the door can be made to make a sudden U-turn, the movement of the game ball T, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, can entertain the player, and the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the start opening door member 1214 extends longer to the left and right than the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j, when the start opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the second start opening Since it is longer than the upper shelf portion 1161j, the starting door member 1214 becomes conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the protruding starting door member 1214. Therefore, when the starting door member 1214 protrudes, the player is made to pay attention to the starting door member 1214, so that the second starting door upper shelf 1161j and the second starting door region left standing wall portion 1161m near the starting door member 1214 Since it is possible to draw attention to the game ball T that is rolling on the second starting port upper shelf 1161j and the starting door member 1214, the game ball T can be reliably seen and moves in a U-turn shape. The movement of the game ball T can be enjoyed, and the game ball T is driven into the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j so that the game ball T can be distributed on the start door member 1214 to the player. The operation can be performed, the player can be entertained, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the start opening door member 1214 is projected, the game ball T is circulated on the start opening door member 1214 via the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start opening region left standing wall portion 1161 m. Since the player is guided to the start port 1153 and received by the second start port 1153, when the start port door member 1214 protrudes according to the gaming state, the game ball T is directed to the start port door member 1214 for the player. It is possible to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the upper shelf portion 1161j of the second start opening, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 aiming at the second starting port 1153 flows down onto the upper shelf portion 1161j of the second starting port, it rolls to the left away from the second starting port 1153. As the game ball T moves away from the second starting port 1153, the player can feel disappointed. Then, when the game ball T is discharged from the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j, if the start port door member 1214 protrudes, the game ball T away from the second start port 1153 is moved by the start port door member 1214. It rolls to the right as it approaches the second starting port 1153. That is, since the game ball T makes a U-turn and returns to the second starting port 1153 side, the player can be pleased and the expectation for accepting the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 is raised. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161k extending vertically to the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is provided on the right outer side of the second starting opening 1153, the second starting opening upper shelf portion extending to the left and right is provided. Even if the game ball T is to be received from the right side where the upper surface of the 1161j is high to the second starting port 1153 arranged below the upper shelf portion 1161j of the second starting port, from the right outer side of the second starting port 1153. The second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161k extending to the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j can prevent the game ball T from being accepted into the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, in order for the second starting port 1153 to receive the game ball T, it is necessary to let the game ball T flow down from the left side where the upper surface of the upper shelf portion 1161j of the second starting port is low, so that the second starting port 1153 It is possible to urge the player to drive the game ball T aiming at the upper shelf portion 1161j of the second starting port so that the game ball T flows down to the side. Then, when the start opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the game ball T is moved by the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j, the second start opening region left standing wall portion 1161 m, and the start opening door member 1214. Since it makes a U-turn and is guided in the direction of the second starting port 1153, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball T that circulates around and to expect the game ball T to be accepted into the second starting port 1153. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player, the game state is changed by the driven game ball T, and the game state is changed to the changed game state. Correspondingly, the start port door member 1214, which extends in the left-right direction longer than the outer diameter of the game ball T and guides the game ball T to the second start port 1153, slides forward and projects into the game area 1100. In the game area 1100, the second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k projecting forward to the right side of the second starting port 1153 is arranged, and the second starting port right is located above the second starting port 1153. The second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j extending shorter than the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 is arranged so that the left side is lower than the upper end of the standing wall portion 1161k, and the starting opening door member 1214 is in the game area 1100. When protruding inward, the left end portion of the start opening door member 1214 extends outward from the left end portion of the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j. Then, when the game ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it rolls on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j toward the left end and flows downward from the left end. .. At this time, if the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T will be received on the start door member 1214 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, when the start door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, it is above the second start port upper shelf 1161j and the start door member 1214 and outside the left end of the second start upper shelf 1161j. When the game ball T is allowed to flow down, the game ball T is received on the start door member 1214. Then, the game ball T received on the start opening door member 1214 is guided to the second start opening 1153 by the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c, and then the second When the player is accepted into the start port 1153, the game ball T is paid out and the special lottery result is drawn as a privilege, and the player can be entertained by the privilege. At this time, since the start door member 1214 extends long in the left-right direction (about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T) so that a plurality of game balls T can be received in the left-right direction. It is possible to make the player think that many game balls T are accepted by the second starting port 1153. More specifically, as players become accustomed to playing with conventional pachinko machines equipped with opening and closing members that extend to the left and right, they become more interested in the size of the opening and closing members that extend to the left and right, and correspond to the opening and closing members. There is relatively little interest in the size of the entrance (for example, the big prize opening). That is, the longer the opening / closing member is to the left and right, the more the game ball T can be accepted. Therefore, it is recognized that the start door member 1214 that protrudes into the game area 1100 and extends to the left and right according to the game state is an opening / closing member in the conventional pachinko machine, and the start door member 1214 extends to the left and right. Therefore, it is an illusion that many game balls T can be accepted. Then, the player can positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214 by the illusion, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. it can. On the other hand, since the second starting port 1153 in which the game ball T is guided by the starting door member 1214 is actually formed in a size that allows only one game ball T to be received, it is placed on the starting door member 1214. Even if a plurality of game balls T flow down, they are not accepted at one time and can only be accepted one by one. Therefore, the number of game balls T accepted per hour can be reduced as compared with the conventional case, and the privilege to be given is By reducing the amount relatively, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the start opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the game ball T is accepted into the second start opening 1153 even if the second start opening upper shelf 1161j is aimed at in addition to the start opening door member 1214. Therefore, even if the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged above the starting opening door member 1214 (second starting opening 1153), the total length of the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 is substantially set. It can be the same as receiving the game ball T all over, and the player can be entertained by mounting a large number of game balls T. At this time, since the lower end on the left side of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is received onto the starting door member 1214, a plurality of game balls T exist simultaneously on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. Even if it is done, it will be handed over to the start port door member 1214 one by one and guided to the second start port 1153, so that it is possible to prevent many game balls T from being accepted by the second start port 1153 at one time. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k protruding into the game area 1100 are provided on the upper side and the right side of the second starting port 1153, the game is played by the starting port door member 1214. If the ball T is not guided to the second starting port 1153, it is difficult for the second starting port 1153 to accept the game ball T. Therefore, since the game ball T cannot be received by the second starting port 1153 unless the starting door member 1214 protrudes, it is possible to give the player a premium feeling by protruding the starting door member 1214. , The protrusion of the start door member 1214 can make the player think that there is something good to do, raise the player's expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

Further, since the standing wall portion 1214e extending upward from the right end portion of the third guide portion 1214c of the start opening door member 1214 is provided, the first guide portion inclined so that the right side of the start opening door member 1214 is lowered. The game ball T guided toward the front side of the second starting port 1153 by the 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b passes through the front side of the second starting port 1153 and further to the right by abutting on the standing wall portion 1214e. It can prevent it from moving to the side. At this time, even if the game ball T gets over the standing wall portion 1214e, since the second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k protrudes into the game area 1100 on the right side of the second starting port 1153, this second starting port The right standing wall portion 1161k can also prevent the game ball T from moving to the right side. Therefore, the game ball T received by the start port door member 1214 can be reliably guided to the second start port 1153 and received.

Further, since the start door member 1214 is slid forward to project into the game area 1100, many games are played as compared with the case where the start door member 1214 is rotated to project. It is possible to reduce the tendency of the starting door member 1214 to be easily damaged by the impact of receiving the ball T. More specifically, when the lower side of the start door member is rotatably supported around an axis extending to the left and right and the upper side is rotated so as to move forward, the start door member is in a protruding state. It becomes difficult to make the stopper for preventing further rotation from the lower side to the upper side of the starting door member longer than the length from the lower side to the upper side, and it is necessary to sufficiently counter the impact caused by receiving many game balls T. There is a risk that it cannot be done. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start door member 1214 is slid forward, and the rear side of the start door member 1214 can be made longer than the portion protruding into the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently counter the impact caused by receiving a large number of game balls T.

Further, since the start door member 1214 is slid forward and protrudes into the game area 1100, the start door member 1214 slides backward when the game ball T is present on the start door member 1214. Then, depending on the position of the game ball T on the start door member 1214, the game ball T falls off from the start door member 1214 before being guided to the second start door 1153, and the second start door 1153 It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being accepted, reduce the acceptance of the game ball T extra, and suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player has a plurality of obstacle nails G, a windmill, and a center accessory arranged in the game area 1100. By abutting on the 1130, the winning opening unit 1150, etc., the game ball T is distributed while moving in various directions, and the game ball T can entertain the player by making various movements. In this normal state, it is difficult for the game ball T to circulate directly below the obstacle nail G or the like with which the game ball T abuts, so that the game ball T is easily distributed in the game area 1100. (First area) and areas that are difficult to distribute will be formed. Therefore, the game ball T is not received in the second starting port 1153 arranged below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161. Then, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, the lower side of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j arranged on the downstream side in response to the detection of the passing game ball T. The start port door member 1214 of the above is advanced and appears in the area (first area) in which the game ball T is easily distributed in the game area 1100, and is outside the area where the game ball T is easily distributed. A region (second region) in which the game ball T is easily distributed is formed in a region below the portion 1161j where the game ball T is difficult to distribute. Therefore, the distribution path of the game ball T changes due to the appearance of the start door member 1214, and the game ball T can be distributed in an area where it is difficult to distribute the game ball T in a normal state. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball T circulating in the unseen area (second area), and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and deteriorating the player's interest.

Further, when the start door member 1214 appears forward, if the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 is guided by the start door member 1214, it is received by the second start door 1153 with an extremely high probability. When the game ball T is accepted into the second start port 1153, the game ball T is paid out and a lottery of the special lottery result in which an advantageous game state occurs is performed. Therefore, when the start door member 1214 appears It is possible to make the player positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball T and suppress the decrease in interest. can do.

Further, the second start port 1153, in which the game ball T is paid out and the special lottery result is drawn, is arranged in an area (second area) where the game ball T is difficult to distribute under the normal state of the start port door member 1214. Therefore, even if the game ball T is hit at the second starting port 1153, the game ball T is not accepted. Then, when the start port door member 1214 advances in response to the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 and the game ball T can be distributed to the region (second region) where the game ball T is difficult to distribute, the second start port The game ball T can be accepted by 1153. Therefore, even if the second starting port 1153 is open in the game area 1100, the game ball T cannot be accepted in the normal state, and it can be accepted unless the starting opening door member 1214 appears (advances). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a premium feeling by advancing the start door member 1214, and it seems that there is something good for the player by advancing the start door member 1214. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in order to advance (appear) the start door member 1214 to form a region (second region) in which the game ball T is easily distributed, it is necessary to pass the game ball T through the gate member 1134. , The player can be made to perform the driving operation (right-handed) of the game ball T aiming at the gate member 1134, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the start door member 1214 moves in the front-rear direction so as to appear and disappear in the game area 1100, it is not necessary to secure a space for immersing the start door member 1214 in the game area 1100. , The area in which the game ball T is distributed can be made as wide as possible in the game area 1100, and the movement of the game ball T becomes large by distributing the game ball T in a wide range, and the game ball T is given to the player. It is possible to entertain the movement of the door and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the flat plate-shaped start port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, third guide portion 1214c, etc.) is moved in the front-rear direction, it is viewed from the player side. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the start door member 1214 is appearing forward or backward and immersing. Therefore, the infested state of the start door member 1214 can be clearly recognized depending on whether or not the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows through the position of the start door member 1214 and comes into contact with the start door member 1214. Therefore, the movement of the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 for recognizing the infestation state can be noticed, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the game ball T flows down the outside of the left end of the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j in a state where the start opening door member 1214 is advanced and appears, the first guide portion 1214a of the flat plate-shaped start opening door member 1214 Since it comes into contact with the upper surface of the second starting port and is guided to the lower side of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, the game ball T is difficult to circulate in the normal state in which the starting opening door member 1214 is immersed. The game ball T can be reliably circulated under the 1161j, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, the start door member 1214 is moved in the front-rear direction so as to appear and disappear in the game area 1100, and the start door member T is in circulation (rolling) on the upper surface of the start door member 1214. When the 1214 is retracted, or while the starting port door member 1214 is retracting, the second starting port comes into contact with the left standing wall portion 1161 m of the second starting port region from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting port changes its direction. When the game ball T flows down on the door member 144, it takes time for the game ball T to reach the second start port 1153 because the start port door member 1214 extends long to the left and right. Since the retracting of the starting door member 1214 is performed in a very short time by driving the starting door solenoid 1215, before the game ball T reaches the right end portion (third guide portion 1214c) of the starting door member 1214. The game ball T will fall from the start door member 1214. Therefore, when the retreat of the start port door member 1214 is started, the game ball T can be prevented from being sufficiently guided, so that the game ball T is additionally accepted into the second start port 1153. It can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In addition, the game ball T falling from the middle of the start door member 1214 can make the player feel disappointed and raise the expectation for the next opportunity, and suppress the decrease in the player's interest. can do.

(Second Embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration, operation, and the like in the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. Since the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. .. Further, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

[1. Technical Idea of Second Embodiment of the Present Invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
A launching means capable of launching a game medium in the game area by the operation of the player,
Preliminary judgment means to draw lots for games when the start conditions are met,
A state notification means that starts the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery result of the pre-determination means and notifies the result of the lottery in the display mode of the symbol stopped by the establishment of the stop condition of the symbol.
A movable member control means that controls the movement of the receiving movable member so that the game medium can pass through the specific area in a predetermined period when the special result is obtained by the preliminary determination means.
A profit-giving state in which a game medium that has become able to pass through the specific area due to the movement of the receiving movable member during the predetermined period can give a profit by passing through the specific area within a predetermined period. Profit-giving state control means to control
When it is determined by the pre-determination means that the ratio of the special result is controlled to a good gaming state higher than that of the normal gaming state and the advantageous profit giving state is controlled, the termination of the advantageous profit giving state is triggered. The game state control means for controlling the game state is provided as described above.
When the special result is drawn by the pre-determination means and the game is controlled to the good game state, the game medium is placed in the specific area before the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means. A means for continuously acquiring a good game state, which can recognizablely notify that the player is controlled to the advantageous profit giving state and then is controlled to the good game state when the game is passed.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above-mentioned game machine (for example, a pachinko machine), the launching means (for example, the handle device 500) launches the game medium (for example, the game ball T) in the game area by the operation of the player, and the pre-determination means (mainly). The control board 1113) draws a lottery related to the game (for example, the random number update process in step S1) when the start condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball T is accepted in the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153). Then, the state notification means (main control board 1113, peripheral control board 1116) starts the variable display of the symbol (for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 1115) based on the lottery result of the pre-determination means, and the symbol The result of the lottery is notified in the display mode of the symbol stopped by the establishment of the stop condition of.

The movable member control means (for example, main control board 1113, accessory winning solenoid 1225, V winning solenoid 1232) receives a specific area (for example, receiving) when a special result (for example, a small hit) is drawn by the pre-determination means. The profit-giving state control means by controlling the movement of the receiving movable member (for example, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221, the rotating body 1236) so that the game medium can pass through the portion 1246a, V winning opening 1156) for a predetermined period. (Main control board 1113) can give a profit by passing a game medium that can pass through a specific area by moving a receiving movable member within a predetermined period of time. The favorable game state control means (main control board 1113) is controlled to the advantageous profit giving state (for example, the big hit game state), and the ratio of the special result obtained by the pre-determination means is higher than that of the normal game state (for example, the good game state (main control board 1113)). For example, when it is determined that the control is performed in the time-saving gaming state) and the advantageous profit granting state is controlled, the favorable gaming state is controlled when the advantageous profit granting state ends.

Then, when the good game state continuous acquisition means (peripheral control board 1116) is drawn by the pre-determination means when it is a special result and is controlled to the good game state (for example, two kinds of big hits with time saving balls). Or, if the game medium is passed through a specific area before the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means), it is controlled to the advantageous profit giving state and then to the good game state. It can be recognizable to be notified (for example, before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the state after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is notified).

In conventional gaming machines, as one of the pachinko gaming machines, a gaming machine (type 1 pachinko machine) of the type in which the main digital becomes a big hit when it becomes a specific mode and the attacker opens and a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and for opening A type in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained by passing a game ball through a predetermined area provided at a position where a prize is opened by winning a prize in the passage port and the game ball can be passed by opening the character. There is known a type 1 and type 2 multifunction device that mixes the elements of the game machine (formerly type 2 pachinko machine).

However, although the game is diversified by using a 1-type and 2-type multifunction device as in the above-mentioned game machine, it is no longer possible to expect an improvement in interest by itself.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the lottery result is a special result and the lottery result is controlled to a good gaming state, the game medium is passed through the specific area before the symbol is stopped and displayed. By adding a new game property of recognizablely notifying that the game is controlled to a favorable game state after being controlled to the advantageous profit giving state, the player is satisfied and the interest is improved.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, it occurs if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game. A case of suggesting to the player whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state will be described.

That is, the game ball received by the receiving portion 1236a by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit is rotated by the rotating body 1236 (from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to FIG. 124 (b)). A case will be described in which it is suggested whether or not the type 2 jackpot that occurs if the player is accepted into the V winning opening 1156 by rotating to the rightward position shown in (1156) is a jackpot with a reduced time.

[2. Processing by peripheral control board]
Next, the processing by the peripheral control board 1116 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. The processing by the peripheral control board 1116 is the same as the timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board 1113 described above, and the series of processing shown in FIGS. 142 to 144 is repeatedly executed at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[2-1. Production control processing by peripheral control board]
First, the effect control process executed on the peripheral control board 1116 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. First, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S100). When the peripheral control board 116 determines that the hold command has not been received (step S100: NO), the peripheral control board 116 shifts the process to step S103.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the hold command has been received (step S100: YES), the number of holds for the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116. Is updated to the value obtained by adding "1" (step S101), and the hold display image (image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is updated (step S102).

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a game state command has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S103). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the game state command has been received (step S103: YES), the game is played in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, based on the information contained in the received game state command. It is determined whether or not it is controlled (step S104).

When it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 has not received the game state command from the main control board 1113 (step S103: NO), or when it is determined that the game is not controlled in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed. (Step S104: NO), the process is transferred to step S106.

On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1116 occurs when it is determined that the game is controlled in the time-saving game state (step S104: YES), and when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game. An advantageous suggestion effect process for suggesting whether or not to shift to the time saving game after the big hit game is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1115 (step S105).

Here, the "advantage suggestion effect" means that when the lottery result is a small hit during the time-saving game, the game ball T is placed in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol is stopped and displayed (while the symbol is changing). It is an effect of recognizablely notifying that the game state is controlled to the short-time game state after being controlled to the big hit game state when passed. Specifically, when a small hit occurs during a time-saving game, a big hit game occurs if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. It suggests to the player whether the subsequent gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

Specifically, during the time-saving game, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156. When the game state is a time-saving game state, the game ball T is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by changing the effect image of the lamp that is off to the effect image of the lamp that is on for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The game state after the big hit game that occurs if is accepted is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, that is, the big hit that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156. Notify the player for each small hit whether or not there is a time-saving game. In this way, by notifying with the effect image of the lamp, the player can grasp at a glance whether or not there is a time-saving game in the big hit within a limited time (within the fluctuation time).

The case where the effect image of the lamp is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 will be described below, but even if the actual lamp (the lamp provided in the pachinko machine 1) that does not use the image is turned on or off to notify the user. Good. It should be noted that the notification of whether or not there is a time-saving game in the big hit is not limited to the production image of the lamp. In addition, the display of the lamp lighting effect image can be clearly grasped by the player by setting the display from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation.

Further, it is also possible from the start of the fluctuation until the accessory winning opening 1155 is closed by the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. Further, the lighting effect image of the lamp may be temporarily displayed (a time that the player can recognize at a glance) from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the lamp is turned on, and the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest in the game.

In this way, in order to notify the presence or absence of the time reduction by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player continuously obtains an advantageous state (big hit with time reduction) depending on the slide timing of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. It becomes possible.

That is, based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect is the time-saving gaming state, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 Since the V winning opening 1156 can accept the game ball depending on the driving operation at the timing when the accessory winning opening 1155 opens, the player can continuously obtain the jackpot with a reduced time. ..

In addition, despite the fact that the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball cannot be accepted in the V winning opening 1156, or the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 to obtain a big hit with a time reduction. If the game cannot be played and the game is in the normal game state, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the big hit game state and the time-saving game state are repeated without entering the normal game state, the time is shortened for each small hit. Notify whether or not there is (execute the advantage suggestion effect even during the subsequent time-saving game).

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (step S106). Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from the main control board 1113. Then, based on whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed since the fluctuation start command was received, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being executed.

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not being executed (step S106: NO), the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the variation start command has been received from the main control board 1113. (Step S107). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the fluctuation start command has not been received (step S107: NO), the process shifts to step S127.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the fluctuation start command has been received (step S107: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S108).

As described above, this fluctuation start command includes setting information of a determination symbol indicating a determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether this setting information is related to the first special symbol determination, or is related to the second special symbol determination. It includes information indicating whether or not the pachinko machine is a product, setting information indicating whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach, setting information of a fluctuation pattern, information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of the special symbol judgment are specified, it is determined whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and the fluctuation time during which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It becomes possible to specify the game state of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 executes the variation effect pattern selection process based on the analysis result (step S109).

Specifically, in the sub ROM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116, regarding the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, the big hit effect table, the effect table with loss reach, the effect table without loss reach, and the small hit effect. At least four production tables of the table are stored. Each of these effect tables is provided with a plurality of tables corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined on the main control board 1113.

The peripheral control board 1116 selects one table from the plurality of tables based on the setting information included in the fluctuation start command. For example, when the setting information includes information indicating "loss", information indicating that "no reach effect" is performed, and information indicating a fluctuation pattern indicating that the "variation time" of the special symbol is 12 seconds. Peripheral control board 1116 selects a loss-reach-free effect table for 12 seconds. At that time, based on the setting information included in the fluctuation start command, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, and the production table according to the gaming state (not shown). Select.

In the above-mentioned effect table, the effect random number and the effect pattern are associated with each other. The peripheral control board 1116 updates the effect random number each time the above-mentioned random number update process is performed, acquires the value at the time when the fluctuation start command is received, and stores a large number of effect patterns stored in the selected effect table. One effect pattern is determined by reading out the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in advance.

By performing the variation effect pattern determination process in this way, the mode of each effect constituting the variation effect such as the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the effect button effect, and the type of the background image is determined. To.

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 starts the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S109 (step S110). As a result, the variable effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the effect control board 130 is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1115 side speaker 130 or the like.

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 updates the reserved number of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S111). The process of step S111 is performed when the variation display of the special symbol this time is related to the first special symbol determination, and is not performed when the variation display of the special symbol is related to the second special symbol determination.

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state based on the setting information included in the fluctuation start command determined to have been received in the process of step S107 ( Step S112). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the game is not in the time-saving gaming state (step S112: NO), the process shifts to step S127.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the game is in the time-saving game state (step S112: YES), the fluctuation start command is seconded based on the information included in the fluctuation start command received this time. It is determined whether or not it is related to the special symbol determination (step S113).

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the variation effect completed this time is not the variation effect related to the second special symbol determination (step S113: NO), that is, when it is the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination. , It is determined whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is "big hit" based on the setting information of the determination symbol included in the fluctuation start command (step S114).

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a specific jackpot (step S114: NO), the process shifts to step S127.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a specific jackpot (step S114: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 sets the hit notification flag stored in the sub RAM to "ON". Is set to (step S115). This hit notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to notify that the hit is a big hit (type 1 big hit or type 2 big hit) in the notification effect that is advanced with the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the time-saving game state. is there. This hit notification flag is set when the judgment result of the special symbol determination is "big hit" or when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" and the game ball is placed in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game. It is set to "ON" when a prize is won. When the hit notification flag is set to "ON", the peripheral control board 1116 shifts the process to step S127.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the change start command is related to the second special symbol determination (step S113: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 is based on the determination symbol setting information included in the variation start command. Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the second special symbol determination this time is a "small hit" (step S117).

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S117: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 executes the advantageous suggestion effect effect process (step S119). That is, as in the process of step S105, the game after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. An effect for suggesting to the player whether the state is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is executed. When the peripheral control board 1116 executes the advantageous suggestion effect processing, the processing shifts to step S127.

In addition, despite the fact that the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball cannot be accepted in the V winning opening 1156, or the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 to obtain a big hit with a time reduction. If the game cannot be played and the game is in the normal game state, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the big hit game state and the time-saving game state are repeated without entering the normal game state, the time is shortened for each small hit. Notify whether or not there is (execute the advantage suggestion effect even during the subsequent time-saving game).

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not "small hit" (step S117: NO), the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit". It is determined whether or not there is (step S118).

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit" (step S118: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 shifts the process to the above step S115 in order to notify the "big hit". On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing" (step S118: NO), it is determined whether or not the start command related to the jackpot game is received from the main control board 1113. (Step S127). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the start command related to the jackpot game has not been received from the main control board 1113 (step S127: NO), the process shifts to step S133.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the start command related to the big hit game has been received (step S127: YES), whether or not the hit notification flag is set to "ON" by the process of step S115 is determined. Determine (step S128). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the hit notification flag is not set to "ON" (step S128: NO), the liquid crystal display device 1115 starts a predetermined start effect (step S129).

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the hit notification flag is set to "ON" (step S128: YES), the liquid crystal display device 1115 is provided with an effect of notifying the "big hit" as a start effect. It is started (step S130), and the hit notification flag is set to "OFF" (step S131).

The peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a round start command has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S133). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the round start command has not been received from the main control board 1113 (step S133: NO), the process shifts to step S135.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the round start command has been received (step S133: YES), the liquid crystal display device 1115 causes the liquid crystal display device 1115 to start the effect during the round (step S134). As a result, the current number of rounds and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 will be updated.

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the end command related to the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S135). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the end command related to the jackpot game has not been received from the main control board 1113 (step S135: NO), the process shifts to step S139.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the end command related to the jackpot game has been received (step S135: YES), the liquid crystal display device 1115 starts a predetermined end effect (step S136).

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a start command related to the small hit game has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S139). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the start command related to the small hit game has not been received from the main control board 1113 (step S139: NO), the process shifts to step S141.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the start command related to the small hit game has been received (step S139: YES), the small hit medium flag stored in the sub RAM is set to "ON" (step S139: YES). Step S140). This small hit medium flag is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit game is in progress so that the game ball can be accepted into the V winning opening 1156 by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. When the start command related to the small hit game is received from, it is set to "ON", and when the end command related to the small hit game is received, it is set to "OFF".

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the small hit medium flag is set to "ON" (step S141). When the peripheral control board 1118 determines that the small hit medium flag is not set to "ON" (step S141: NO), the peripheral control board 1118 shifts the process to step S144.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the small hit medium flag is set to "ON" (step S141: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the V winning command has been received from the main control board 1113. (Step S142). That is, whether or not the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit game is received by the V winning opening 1156 by rotating the rotating body 1236. Determine.

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the V winning command has not been received from the main control board 1113 (step S142: NO), the process shifts to step S144, while the V winning command is issued from the main control board 1113. When it is determined that the command has been received (step S142: YES), the hit notification flag stored in the sub RAM is set to “ON” (step S143).

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the end command related to the small hit game has been received (step S144). When it is determined that the peripheral control board 166 has not received the end command related to the small hit game (step S144: NO), the peripheral control board 166 ends the effect control process.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the end command related to the small hit game has been received (step S144: YES), the small hit middle flag is set to "OFF" (step S145).

Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the hit notification flag is set to "ON" (step S146). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the hit notification flag is set to "ON" (step S146: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 ends the effect control process.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the hit notification flag is not set to "ON" (step S146: NO), the peripheral control board 1116 starts an effect of notifying the loss (step S147). That is, since the game ball was not accepted in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game, the liquid crystal display device 1115 starts the effect of notifying the "loss" when the small hit game is completed.

Then, the peripheral control board 1116 sets the hit notification flag stored in the sub RAM to “OFF” (step S148). When the hit notification flag is set to "OFF", the peripheral control board 1116 ends the effect control process.

As described above, the opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the accessory winning opening 1155 determined based on the small hit symbol random number is received from the main control board 1113. Therefore, in the advantageous suggestion effect processing of step S105 and step S119 described above, the opening timing of the accessory winning opening 1155 may be notified based on the opening / closing pattern. By notifying the opening timing of the accessory winning opening 1155 in this way, it is possible to facilitate the driving operation by matching the opening timing of the accessory winning opening 1155.

(Third Embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration, operation, and the like in the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. Since the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. To do. Further, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

[1. Technical Thought of Third Embodiment of the Present Invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
A lottery means for drawing lots when the lottery conditions are met,
A state notification means for notifying that a game related to the lottery by the lottery means is in progress by displaying a variable symbol, and for notifying that the game has ended by stopping and displaying a symbol.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, it is impossible or difficult to control the movement of the receiving movable member so that the game medium can pass through the specific area provided at the position related to the receiving movable member. A movable member control means capable of controlling from the first state to a second state in which passage to the specific region is easier than in the first state, and
A profit-giving means for giving a profit by passing the game medium through the specific area,
When the lottery result is a high-specific result that can be controlled to a high-profit gaming state in which the ratio of the specific result is higher than usual, the lottery result is controlled to the high-profit gaming state when the granting of the profit is completed. Equipped with a possible high-profit game state granting means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to discriminately present whether or not the profit is controlled to the high profit state after the profit is given before the game is started and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means. Profit presentation means and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the game machine (for example, pachinko machine 1), the lottery means (main control board 1113) receives the game ball T at the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 when the lottery conditions are satisfied (for example, the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153). The lottery is performed (in the wake of this), and the status notification means (main control board 1113, peripheral control board 1116) notifies that the game related to the lottery by the lottery means is in progress by fluctuating the symbol, and the game. Is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed or stopped by the liquid crystal display device 1115).

The movable member control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the accessory winning solenoid 1225, the V winning solenoid 1232) receives the movable member (for example, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result. 1221, Rotating body 1236) is controlled to control the movement of the game medium (for example, the game ball T) to a specific area (for example, the receiving portion 1246a, V winning opening 1156) provided at a position related to the receiving movable member. A state in which passage is controlled from an impossible or difficult first state to a second state in which passage to a specific area is easier than in the first state (for example, a state in which the receiving portion 1246a is closed by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221). The profit-giving means (main control board 1113) grants a profit (for example, a big hit) when the game medium passes through a specific area, and the profit-giving means (main control board 1113) gives a profit (for example, a big hit). ) Is a high-specific result that can be controlled to a high-profit gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which the ratio of the lottery result to a specific result (for example, a small hit) is higher than usual. When it is finished, it is controlled to a high profit game state.

Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the symbol is continuously stopped and displayed 1000 times during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state), the high profit presenting means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116) is displayed. , Before the game is started and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means, the profit is controlled to a high profit state after the profit is given (for example, after the big hit game is finished) (for example, is the time-saving game state? ) (For example, before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the state after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is notified).

As a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed based on a game ball winning a prize at a starting port (for example, a first starting port or a second starting port), and when the lottery is won, if a specific condition is satisfied after the winning. , There are pachinko machines that give advantageous profits according to the lottery results. In such pachinko machines, the degree of advantage of the profit to be given differs depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

However, a game machine such as the above-mentioned game machine, which makes a difference in the degree of advantage of the profit to be given depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, is not new anymore, and thus satisfies a player who seeks further game entertainment. It's getting harder to get.

Therefore, in the present invention, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lottery result becomes the specific result after the granting of the profit due to the passing of the game medium through the specific area is completed before the game is started and the symbol is stopped and displayed. It is presented so that it can be discriminated whether the ratio is controlled to a higher profit state than usual.

Here, assuming that "a predetermined condition has been satisfied", the lottery result is obtained by displaying the decorative symbol 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state. Will be described when is displayed. Specifically, it is assumed that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the variation display of the symbol is performed 1000 times without the jackpot game state, that is, the so-called fitting state.

Further, the "specific area provided at a position related to the receiving movable member" means that the game ball is received in the specific area if the game medium is received by the receiving movable member. The receiving movable member and the specific area may or may not be a unit. Further, even if the specific area is not provided at a position close to the receiving movable member, the game ball may move so that the game ball is received in the specific area when the game medium is received by the receiving movable member. For example, the receiving movable member may be provided at a distance away from the specific area. That is, the receiving movable member and the specific area may have a structure in which the game medium received by the receiving movable member by movement is received in the specific area.

Further, the "first state in which the game medium cannot pass or is difficult" is the state in which the game medium cannot pass through the specific area, or the second state in which the game medium can easily pass through the specific area. It means a state in which the game medium is more difficult to pass than the state, but may rarely pass through.

Then, in the third embodiment of the present invention, when the number of variable display of the symbol reaches 1000 times without entering the big hit game state during the normal game, the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game. Before the judgment result (lottery result) of the judgment is displayed, the game state after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the normal game state or the time-saving game state. The case of suggesting the existence to the player will be described.

That is, when the number of times the symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 reaches 1000 times during the normal game state without entering the big hit game state, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 slides during the small hit to receive the symbol. Suppose that the game ball received in the unit 1236a is received in the V winning opening 1156 by rotating the rotating body 1236 (rotating from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right pointing position shown in FIG. 124 (b)). A case of suggesting whether or not the two types of jackpots that occur are jackpots with a reduced time will be described.

[2. Processing by the main control board and processing by the peripheral control board]
The process according to the third embodiment of the present invention executes a process substantially the same as the process by the main control board and the process by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the third embodiment of the present invention, the number of times that the liquid crystal display device 1115 stops and displays the symbol indicating the lottery result during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state is the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116 (not shown). ), And when the number of times of storage (cumulative fluctuation number) reaches a predetermined number of times (1000 times in this embodiment), the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

Specifically, the number of times the decorative symbol is changed and displayed (cumulative number of times) on the liquid crystal display device 1115 based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309 during the normal gaming state is set to the peripheral control board 1116. Count with the RAM of.

Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the game state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM is 1000 times or more. Judge whether or not.

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 1000 or more, the peripheral control board 1116 executes an advantage suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 1000 or more, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the time saving game (not shown). Then, when the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving game state, the effect image of the lamp that is lit is the effect image of the lamp that is off. If the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by changing the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) to, the game state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal game state or the time-saving game state. That is, if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, the player is notified for each small hit whether or not there is a time reduction in the big hit that occurs.

In addition, despite the fact that the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball cannot be accepted in the V winning opening 1156, or the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 to obtain a big hit with a time reduction. If the game cannot be played and the game is in the normal game state, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the big hit game state and the time-saving game state are repeated without entering the normal game state, the time is shortened for each small hit. Notify whether or not there is (execute the advantage suggestion effect even during the subsequent time-saving game).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the peripheral control board 1116 clears the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM. By configuring the cumulative fluctuation count to be backed up, the cumulative fluctuation count can be continuously counted even when the power supply is cut off.

In this way, in order to notify the presence or absence of time reduction by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player continues to be in an advantageous state (big hit with time reduction) depending on the slide timing of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. It becomes possible to obtain.

That is, based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game, which occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect, is the time-saving gaming state, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 Since the V winning opening 1156 can accept the game ball depending on the driving operation at the timing when the accessory winning opening 1155 opens, the player can continuously obtain a big hit with a time saving by himself / herself. ..

In addition, when it is determined that the number of times the symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is 1000 times or more during the normal game state without entering the big hit game state, the advantage suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it can be a relief for the long-term progress of the game in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player.

That is, if a long-term game is played in a normal game state without becoming a big hit game state, it is disadvantageous for the player. However, even if the disadvantageous normal game state continues for a long time, if the game state changes from the big hit game state to the time-saving game state after that, the player continues the big hit with the time-saving by executing the advantage suggestion effect. By obtaining it, it becomes possible to make the game advantageous.

In addition, even if the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player continues, the jackpot gaming state may change to the time-saving gaming state after that, and the jackpot with a time-saving may be continuously obtained by executing the advantage suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation even during the normal gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, when the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state is close to 1000 times (for example, 800 times or more, 900 times or more, etc.), the game is played. Even during the normal gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, the cumulative number of fluctuations is 1000, and it is possible to be thrilled whether or not the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

It should be noted that the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state is displayed in an area other than the area where the symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. (Not shown), the player can clearly grasp the cumulative number of fluctuations while paying attention to the symbol showing the lottery result.

In the third embodiment described above, it is assumed that "a predetermined condition has been satisfied", and the liquid crystal display device 1115 stops and displays the lottery result 1000 times during the normal game state without entering the big hit game state. As described above, it can be assumed that the above-mentioned predetermined conditions are satisfied when the stop display is displayed 1000 times without entering the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

Further, the case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously during the normal game state has been described, but the lottery result is shown on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time-saving game state and the normal game state. It can be assumed that the symbol is stopped and displayed 1000 times. Specifically, when the game state shifts to the time-saving game state after the big hit game state, when the number of times stopped and displayed during the time-saving game state and the normal game state reaches 1000 times, the small hit game is in progress. Perform an advantage suggestion effect.

Further, although the case where the stop display is displayed 1000 times has been described, it is not limited to 1000 times. However, it is desirable that the number of times the player can easily remember the advantage suggestion effect is 500 times, 1000 times, 1500 times, or the like.

In addition, the number of times the stop display is displayed can be randomly determined from a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the number of times of 1 is randomly determined from 500 times, 1000 times, and 1500 times. The number of times is determined when the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered, and the game ball T is accepted at the first start port 1152 (may be the second start port 1153) during this normal game state. May be decided. By randomly determining the number of times in this way, it is possible to diversify the game.

When the number of times is randomly determined as described above, the player may be notified of the determined number of times. In this way, by notifying the determined number of times, for example, when 500 times are determined out of 500 times, 1000 times, and 1500 times, it is possible to make the player think that he is lucky today. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation for the game.

Further, when the determined number of times is not notified to the player, for example, when the number of times the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 reaches 600 times during the normal gaming state and the jackpot gaming state is reached, the determination is made. It is possible to excite the player until the time-saving game state is reached (until the advantage suggestion effect is executed) whether the number of times played is 500 times or 1000 times.

Further, it may be determined whether or not to notify the presence or absence of the time reduction by a lottery executed every predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 500 times). Then, for example, when it is determined that the number of fluctuations is 500 and the presence or absence of a time reduction is notified, it is not necessary to execute a lottery as to whether or not to notify each subsequent number of fluctuations. Then, when it is decided to notify, it is possible to improve the expectation for the time-saving game state by notifying before the time-saving game state is reached.

In addition, the number of times the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is shown on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is a multiple of the average number of variable display times in which the game ball rented out for 1000 yen is displayed in a variable manner (for example, a game rented out for 1000 yen). By setting the average number of fluctuations 20 times x 25 = 500 times and the average number of fluctuations 20 times x 50 = 1000 times), the game will be in a big hit game state if the game is continued for a while. By making the player think that the advantage suggestion effect may be executed in the time-saving game state, the motivation to continue the game can be improved.

In the above case, since there are game machines with different game ball charges in recent years, if the price of each game ball is 4 yen, the average number of variable display is performed on the game ball rented for 1000 yen. In the case of 20 times, and 1 yen per game ball, it can be a multiple of 40 times, which is the average number of times the fluctuation is displayed on the game ball rented for 1000 yen.

Further, it can be determined by the game ball lent when the ball renting button 361 that starts renting the game ball from the ball renting machine is operated once. In other words, in the case of 4 yen per game ball, 500 yen worth of game balls are lent out in one operation, and the average number of variable display times is 10 times, in which the rented game balls are displayed in a variable manner. In the case of 1 yen per game ball, 200 yen worth of game balls can be rented in one operation, and a multiple of 16 times, which is the average number of variable display times, is displayed on the rented game ball. can do.

Further, it is assumed that "a predetermined condition is satisfied", for example, when a small hit is provided even during a normal gaming state, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the small hit reaches a predetermined number of times. it can. The number of small hits may be randomly determined in the same manner as in the case where the number of fluctuations described above is randomly determined.

In addition, in the third embodiment of the present invention, the case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the so-called fitting state is satisfied as "a predetermined condition is satisfied" has been described, but a specific symbol (for example, "7") has been described. If you get a big hit with (design), if you get a big hit with a specific reach, or if you get a big hit when you display a predetermined number of reach, the advantage suggestion effect is executed during the subsequent time saving game state. You may. In this case, the expectation for the game can be improved by making the player think that he / she is lucky today.

In addition, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect may be different depending on "the predetermined condition is satisfied". Specifically, if the number of times the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal game state is 200 times or less, it is notified once during the time-saving game state whether or not it is a big hit with a time reduction, 201. If the number of times is 500 or less, the advantage suggestion effect is started when the time saving game is 20 times remaining, and if the time is 501 times or more, the advantage suggestion effect is always executed during the time saving game state. In this way, by making the execution of the advantage suggestion effect different depending on the conditions in the normal game state, the type of relief can be changed depending on the so-called entangled state in the normal game state.

Further, in the third embodiment of the present invention, the case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the case of a so-called fitting state as "a predetermined condition is satisfied" has been described, but a predetermined time (for example, 90 minutes) has been described. ) When the game is continued, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed. That is, it may be determined whether or not the game is continued for a predetermined time based on the time (timer).

In addition, when the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the game is continued for a predetermined time as described above, the game ball T is not accepted at the first starting port 1152 for a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) during the normal game. In this case, if the handle device 500 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes), the player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 is not detected for a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) by a sensor or the like. When it is determined that the player is not playing the game, the time (timer) is reset, and when the game is played again, the time is newly counted.

In addition, as "a predetermined condition was satisfied", the lottery result was displayed by continuously displaying the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1115 1000 times during the normal game state without entering the big hit game state. Although the case has been described, the case may be the case where the lottery result is shown 1000 times by the special symbol or the ordinary symbol on the function display 1114, or the case where the lottery related to the game is performed 1000 times without being in the big hit game state. It may be.

With the above configuration, it is possible to notify only the player who has continued the game for a long time whether or not it is a big hit with a time saving by the advantage suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to rescue only the player who has become so-called stuck. Further, since the player who plays the pachinko machine 1 tries to continue the game for a long time, the operating rate can be improved.

(Characteristic effects of the second and third embodiments of the present invention)
The second and third embodiments of the present invention described above have the same effects as those in the first embodiment of the present invention, but also have the following effects.

In the embodiment of the present invention, if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect even before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time saving game. By providing a pachinko machine with a new playability that suggests to the player the game state after the big hit game that occurs, the player is satisfied and the deterioration of the interest is suppressed.

That is, in order to notify the game state after the end of the big hit game, which occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 due to the advantage suggestion effect during the time-saving game, before the lottery result is shown on the liquid crystal display device 1115. Based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving gaming state, the player uses the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 to open the accessory winning opening 1155. The game ball can be accepted by the V winning opening 1156 by performing a driving operation that matches the timing of opening. For this reason, the player can realize a novel game property that he / she can continuously obtain a big hit with a short time, and can improve his / her interest.

In particular, before the symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, that is, while the decorative symbol is fluctuating on the liquid crystal display device 1115, the advantage suggestion effect is performed to win the prize. It is possible to secure a time for performing the driving operation in accordance with the timing at which 1155 opens.

Further, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving game state. In this case, the presence or absence of a time reduction is notified by changing the effect image of the lamp that is off to the effect image of the lamp that is on. By notifying with the extinguishing or lighting image of the lamp in this way, the player can recognize the presence or absence of the time reduction at a glance, so that many players are given a useful opportunity to continue the jackpot with the time reduction. Can be done.

In addition, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and the game state after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 during the time saving game is displayed. Since it is notified for each small hit whether or not it is in the time-saving game state, the player can be given a chance to win the time-saving big hit every time the lottery result is a two-kind big hit with time reduction (see FIG. 126).

In this way, in order to execute the advantage suggestion effect before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, the player secures time to prepare for the big hit game with a short time. be able to. That is, when the player is notified by the advantageous suggestion effect that the game state after the big hit game is the time-saving game state, the player actively aims to pass the game ball T through the V winning opening 1156. I do. However, for example, when the game ball T to be launched aiming at the V winning opening 1156 is exhausted (when there is no game ball T in the upper plate 301), the time for renting the game ball T (adjacent to the pachinko machine 1). Since it takes time to insert cash or a prepaid card into the provided ball lending machine and press the ball lending button 361), the advantage suggestion effect is executed after the symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If you do, you may miss the chance to win a big hit with a short time.

However, by executing the advantage suggestion effect before the symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the player can prepare the game ball T or the like in advance so as not to miss the chance of winning the jackpot with a short time. it can. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the chance of winning the jackpot with a reduced time from being missed, and it is also possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate by preparing not to miss the chance to win a jackpot with a reduced time. ..

Then, in order to notify the presence or absence of a time reduction by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player can continuously obtain an advantageous state (big hit with a time reduction) depending on the slide timing of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. It will be possible.

In addition, despite the fact that the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball T cannot be accepted in the V winning opening 1156, or the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 to obtain a big hit with a time reduction. If it is not possible to enter the normal game state, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the big hit game state and the time saving game state are repeated without entering the normal game state, the time is shortened to the big hit for each small hit. Notifies whether or not there is (executes the advantage suggestion effect even during the subsequent time-saving game). For this reason, it is possible to continue the jackpot with a reduced time, and it is possible to give a lot of players a useful opportunity.

Further, if the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state, the advantage suggestion effect is executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be a relief for the long-term progress of the game in the game state.

In addition, since it can be used as a relief for the long-term progress of the game in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from being disgusted by the long-term continuous game state and stopping the game. Therefore, the operating rate can be improved.

Further, even though the advantage suggestion effect is executed, the game ball cannot be accepted in the V winning opening 1156, or the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 to obtain a big hit with a time reduction. If the game cannot be played and the game is in the normal game state, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the big hit game state and the time-saving game state are repeated without entering the normal game state, the time is reduced for each small hit. Notify whether or not there is (execute the advantage suggestion effect even during the subsequent time-saving game). For this reason, it is possible to continue the jackpot with a reduced time, and it is possible to give a lot of players a useful opportunity.

In addition, even if the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player continues, the jackpot gaming state may change to the time-saving gaming state after that, and the jackpot with a time-saving may be continuously obtained by executing the advantage suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation even during the normal gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, when the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state is close to 1000 times (for example, 800 times or more, 900 times or more, etc.), the game is played. Even during the normal gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, the cumulative number of fluctuations is 1000, and it is possible to be thrilled whether or not the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

It should be noted that the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state is displayed in an area other than the area for displaying the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1115. (Not shown), the player can clearly grasp the cumulative number of fluctuations while paying attention to the decorative pattern showing the lottery result.

Then, as a case where "a predetermined condition is satisfied", a symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously during the normal game state without being in the big hit game state. In addition, by assuming that the condition that the player does not intend (the player cannot be involved) is satisfied, it is possible to make the game more exciting and enhance the interest.

(Other embodiments of the first to third embodiments of the present invention)
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like of the other embodiments of the first to third embodiments of the present invention will be described. Since the pachinko machine 1 according to another embodiment has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. And.

[1. Rotation mode of rotating body]
In the above-described embodiment, the rotating body 1236 is rotated from the upward position (standby position) shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right-facing position shown in FIG. 124 (b), thereby causing the accessory winning opening 1155. Although the case where the game ball T received in the receiving unit 1236a can be received in the V winning opening 1156 has been described, other rotation modes can be used.

Specifically, the rotating body 1236 is kept on standby at the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the rotating body 1236 is rotated to the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to receive the rotating body 1236. The game ball T can be made acceptable to the unit 1236a. Then, the player can be thrilled about whether or not the game ball T is accepted by the receiving portion 1236a by the opening / closing pattern of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 determined based on the small hit symbol random number. It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T and improve the interest of the player.

[2. Suggestion mode by advantage suggestion production]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is always displayed as an advantage suggestion effect (not shown), and it occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156. When the game state after the big hit game is the time saving game state, the case of notifying the presence or absence of the time saving by changing the effect image of the lamp that is off to the effect image of the lamp that is on has been described. , Other aspects can be used.

Specifically, if a small hit occurs during the time-saving game, after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. It is possible to display in characters such as "with time reduction!" Or "without time reduction!" Whether the game state of is a normal game state or a time reduction game state. In this way, it is possible to more clearly notify the player of the presence or absence of a time reduction by displaying the characters.

Further, by changing the color of the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of a time reduction. Specifically, if the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is a time-saving game state, the decorative pattern is displayed in rainbow color, which is different from the normal decorative pattern. By displaying in color, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of a time reduction while paying attention to the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the presence or absence of time reduction can be notified by making the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 different. Specifically, if the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the normal game state, the cat character is displayed, and the game state after the big hit game is shortened. By displaying the dog character in the game state, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of time reduction while diversifying the production mode.

In addition, the presence or absence of a time reduction can be notified by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player. Specifically, if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the pressing operation unit 405 is vibrated when the game state after the big hit game is the time-saving game state, and the game state after the big hit game is the normal game. It is possible to suppress actions such as the player hitting the glass unit 590 by vibrating more strongly, vibrating for a longer time, etc. in the time-saving game state than in the state.

That is, when notifying the presence or absence of a time reduction by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, many players operate the handle device 500 with the right hand in order to drive the game ball T into the game area 1100, and the left hand is the pressing operation unit. Since he is touching 405, both hands are occupied. In this state, it becomes difficult to hit the glass unit 590 in order to insert the game ball into the accessory winning opening 1155, the receiving portion 1236a, and the V winning opening 1156, so that damage to the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. can do.

In addition to the vibration, even if the presence or absence of the time reduction is notified by the air from the pressing operation unit 405, the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained.

[3. Continuation of advantage suggestion production]
In the above-described embodiment, although the advantage suggestion effect is executed, the game ball T cannot be received in the V winning opening 1156, or the time is shortened depending on the timing when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156. Even if the jackpot cannot be obtained and the normal game state is reached, the case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the time-saving game state is reached in the subsequent games has been described, but the advantage suggestion is given under predetermined conditions. You may decide whether or not to perform the production.

Specifically, it is possible to execute the advantage suggestion effect only during the time-saving game related to the first hit, and not to execute the advantage suggestion effect when the time-saving game state is reached in the subsequent games. In addition, only when the predetermined conditions are met at the time of the first hit (a big hit with a specific symbol, a big hit with a specific random number, a big hit with a specific reach, etc.), the subsequent games When the game is in a short-time game state, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed. By executing the advantage suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to improve the expectation for the first hit, and it is possible to obtain a pachinko machine with new playability.

In addition, the execution mode of the advantage suggestion effect can be changed in the subsequent games depending on the number of fluctuations in the normal game state until the big hit game with a reduced time is reached. For example, if the number of fluctuations in the normal game state until the big hit game with time reduction is 200 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed only during the time-saving game related to the first hit, and in the subsequent games, the time-saving game state is set. If it becomes, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the number of fluctuations in the normal game state is 1000 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed even when the time-saving game state is reached in the subsequent games. Can be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to provide relief for the long-term progress of the game in a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the number of executions of the advantage suggestion effect can be changed in the subsequent games depending on the number of fluctuations in the normal game state until the big hit game with a reduced time is reached. For example, if the number of fluctuations in the normal game state until the big hit game with time reduction is 200 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed only twice including the time reduction game related to the first hit, and the third and subsequent games. In the case of the time-saving game state, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but when the number of fluctuations in the normal game state is 1000 times, the advantage suggestion effect is performed only 7 times including the time-saving game related to the first hit. It can be configured so that the advantage suggestion effect is not executed when the game is executed and the game is in a time-saving game state in the eighth and subsequent games. With this configuration, for example, when the advantage suggestion effect is executed only 7 times including the time-saving game related to the first hit, a big hit with no time-saving is performed during the second time-saving game, and the normal game state is obtained after the big hit game. Even if it becomes, if it becomes a big hit with a short time, an advantage suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the big hit with a short time may be continuously obtained, and the utilization rate is improved. Can be made to.

[4. Suggestion timing of advantage suggestion production]
In the above-described embodiment, by constantly displaying the effect image of the lamp that is turned off on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time-saving game, after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156. The case where the game state is always notified (notified for each small hit) will be described, but a case where the game state is notified and a case where the game state is not notified (a case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed and a case where the advantage suggestion effect is not executed) can be provided.

Specifically, by providing a period during which the game is easily notified and a period during which the game is difficult to be notified (a game period that is always notified and a game period that is not always notified), it is possible to further add new game playability. .. For example, out of 100 short-time games, 1 to 20 games are easily notified, 21 to 40 games are difficult to be notified, 41 to 60 games are easily notified, 61 to 80 games are difficult to be notified, and 81 games are difficult to be notified. From 100 games are easy to be notified. By setting the period in this way, it is possible to improve the expectation for the period when it is easy to be notified, and by making the driving operation different by the player, it is possible to dramatically suppress the decline in the interest during the time saving. Can be done.

In addition, if a predetermined condition is met at the time of the first hit (a big hit with a specific symbol, a big hit with a specific random number, a big hit with a specific reach, etc.), it is easy to be notified. When the period is lengthened and the predetermined condition is not satisfied at the time of the first hit, the period for which the notification is likely to be made can be shortened as compared with the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied at the time of the first hit. By providing the period in this way, it is possible to improve the expectation for the first hit.

Further, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed only when the fluctuation satisfies the predetermined condition. Specifically, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed only when the small hit symbol random number acquired by the main control board 1113 is a specific random number (when it is a specific symbol). In this way, by executing the advantage suggestion effect only when the small hit symbol random number is a specific random number, it is possible to improve the expectation for the specific symbol.

Further, when the small hit symbol random number acquired by the main control board 1113 is a specific random number, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed without fail during the subsequent time reduction. Further, when the small hit symbol random number is a specific random number, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed only for the subsequent predetermined time-saving period (for example, between 20 games). Furthermore, when the advantage suggestion effect is always executed during the subsequent time reduction and the advantage suggestion effect is always executed only during the subsequent predetermined time reduction period, the variation in which the small hit symbol random number is a specific random number may be included. However, the small hit symbol random number does not include the fluctuation that was a specific random number, and may be set during the subsequent time reduction and the subsequent predetermined time reduction period. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation for the execution of the advantage suggestion effect.

(Fourth Embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration, operation, and the like in the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Since the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. .. Further, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

[1. Technical Idea of Fourth Embodiment of the Present Invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention can be represented as the following technical idea 1.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Lottery means to draw lots for games and
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the passage control means capable of controlling the passage allowed state in which the game medium can pass through the specific area, and
A profit-giving control means for controlling a profit-giving state when the game medium passes through the specific area,
When the game medium is passed through the specific area, after the end of the profit-giving state, a normal acquisition means that can be controlled to a normal state and an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the lottery, and a normal acquisition means.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operating means, the advantage over the normal state is obtained after the end of the profit-giving state, although the predetermined ratio is the same when the game medium is passed through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an acquisition means with notification that can increase the rate of control by the gaming state.

In the game machine (for example, pachinko machine 1), the operating means (for example, the handle device 500) can be operated by the player, and the lottery means (for example, the main control board 1113) draws lots for the game (for example). , A lottery is performed when the game ball T is received in the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153).

Further, the passage control means (for example, the main control board 1113) puts a game medium (for example, a game ball T) in a specific area (for example, receiving portion 1246a, V winning opening 1156) based on the result of lottery by the lottery means. Controlled to a passable passable state, the profit-giving control means (for example, the main control board 1113) controls the profit-giving state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, the game state is changed to the jackpot game state). The normal acquisition means (for example, the main control board 11113) is more advantageous than the normal state and the normal state at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the lottery after the end of the profit-giving state when the game medium is passed through the specific area. Control to an advantageous state (for example, control to a normal game state or a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends).

Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operating means, the notification acquisition means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116) has the same predetermined ratio when passing through the game medium in the specific area. After the end of the profit-giving state, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous gaming state can be increased as compared with the normal state (for example, the player advances the game so as not to accept the game ball into the V winning opening 1156 during the time-saving game. When the number of fluctuations of the symbol during the time-saving game reaches 80 times without entering the jackpot game state, the jackpot with a time reduction is used to notify the state after the jackpot game that would occur if the game ball was accepted at the V winning opening 1156. The percentage that can be obtained will be higher).

As a conventional game machine, a type 1 pachinko machine that shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player when the main digital is in a specific mode, and a game ball that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the privilege area due to the opening of a movable piece or the like. There is known a one-kind two-kind multifunction device that mixes the two elements of the old two-kind pachinko machine that shifts to the gaming state.

However, since the above-mentioned type 1 and type 2 multifunction devices are no longer new, it is becoming difficult to satisfy players who seek further game entertainment.

Therefore, in the present invention, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operating means that can be operated by the player, when the game medium is passed through the specific area, the gaming state is controlled to be more advantageous than the normal state after the end of the profit-giving state. Achieves a novel playability that can increase the ratio of games, and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the following, assuming that "a predetermined condition is satisfied" by the operation of the operating means, the player is prevented from accepting the game ball into the V winning opening 1156 during the time-saving game by the driving operation by the handle device 500 as the operating means. A case where the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the time-saving game reaches 80 times without being in the big hit game state due to the progress of the game will be described.

Then, in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the number of fluctuation display of the symbol during the time-saving game is reduced to 80 times without entering the big hit game state by the driving operation of the game ball T by the player operating the handle device 500. When it reaches, the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the judgment result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game. A case of suggesting to the player whether the subsequent gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state will be described.

That is, when the number of times the symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time-saving game state without entering the big hit game state by the player's driving operation of the game ball T reaches 80 times, the opening / closing member during the small hit. The game ball received by the receiving portion 1236a by sliding 1221 wins a V prize by rotating the rotating body 1236 (rotating from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right pointing position shown in FIG. 124 (b)). It is suggested until the end of the time-saving game whether or not the type 2 big hit that occurs if it is accepted into the mouth 1156 is a time-saving big hit (for example, even if the symbol is changed 80 times in the time-saving game state, the big hit occurs. If not, it will be suggested in the remaining 20 times).

Then, even though the probability that a jackpot with a time reduction will occur does not change, the game ball T is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by the driving operation of the game ball T by the notification that the game state after the jackpot game is the time reduction game state. Will be accepted to obtain a jackpot with a time reduction, so a case where the probability of a jackpot with a time reduction can be increased will be described.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention can be represented as the following technical idea 2.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Lottery means to draw lots for games and
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the passage control means capable of controlling the passage allowed state in which the game medium can pass through the specific area, and
A profit-giving control means for controlling a profit-giving state when the game medium passes through the specific area,
When the game medium is passed through the specific area, after the end of the profit-giving state, a normal acquisition means that can be controlled to a normal state and an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the lottery, and a normal acquisition means.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operating means, the advantage over the normal state is obtained after the end of the profit-giving state, although the predetermined ratio is the same when the game medium is passed through the specific area. Equipped with a notification acquisition means that can increase the rate of control by the game state,
Acquisition means for which the notification can be executed The predetermined condition is a gaming machine characterized in that the acquisition means can be executed by abandoning the profit by preventing the game medium from passing through the specific area by the acquisition means.

Even in the above technical idea 2, as in the above technical idea 1, the symbol changes during the time-saving game without being in the big hit game state due to the driving operation of the game ball T by the player operating the handle device 500. When the number of display reaches 80 times, the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the judgment result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game. If so, it is possible to suggest to the player whether the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

Then, the probability that a jackpot with a time reduction will occur depending on whether the gaming state after the jackpot game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Even though the game does not change, the V winning opening 1156 is made to accept the game ball T by the driving operation of the game ball T by the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the time-saving game state, and the game ball T with the time reduction is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of becoming a big hit with a short time.

[2. Processing by the main control board and processing by the peripheral control board]
The process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention executes a process substantially the same as the process by the main control board and the process by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116 indicates the number of times that the liquid crystal display device 1115 stops and displays the symbol indicating the lottery result during the time-saving game state without entering the big hit game state. When the number of times of storage (cumulative number of fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (80 times in this embodiment), the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

Specifically, the number of times the decorative symbol is changed and displayed (cumulative number of times) on the liquid crystal display device 1115 based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309 during the time saving game state is set to the peripheral control board 1116. Count with the RAM of.

Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the game state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM is 80 times or more. Judge whether or not.

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 80 or more, the peripheral control board 1116 executes an advantage suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 80 or more, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the subsequent time-saving game (not shown). Then, when the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving game state, the effect image of the lamp that is off is changed to the effect image of the lamp that is on. By changing the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the gaming ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. That is, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect of notifying the player for each small hit whether or not there is a time reduction in the big hit that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is started.

More specifically, when the variation display of the symbol is performed 100 times during the time-saving game (when the lottery is performed 100 times during the time-saving game), the symbol will not be in the big hit game state after the time-saving game is started. When the number of times that the variable display reaches 80 times, whether or not the big hit that occurs if the game ball T is accepted into the V winning opening 1156 by sliding the opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit is a time-saving big hit. Is suggested in the remaining 20 times.

When the number of times the symbol is varied and displayed reaches 80 times and the advantage suggestion effect is executed (when the execution is decided), the peripheral control board 1116 does not enter the big hit game state after the time saving game starts. Clear the cumulative number of fluctuations. When the gaming state shifts from the time-saving game state to the big hit game state (when the time-saving game ends), the cumulative number of fluctuations counted in the RAM may be cleared. Then, when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving game state and the time-saving game is started after that, the cumulative number of fluctuations is counted again in the RAM.

In addition, the cumulative number of fluctuations is cleared even when the game shifts to the jackpot game state before the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner after the start of the time-saving game reaches 80 times.

Then, the peripheral control board 1116 hides the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the jackpot gaming state or when the time-saving gaming state ends. And the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is completed.

Further, by providing a configuration in which the cumulative number of fluctuations is backed up, the cumulative number of fluctuations can be continuously counted even when the power supply is cut off.

[3. Characteristic effects of the fourth embodiment of the present invention]
The fourth embodiment of the present invention described above has substantially the same effects as those in the first and second embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following effects.

In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, since the presence or absence of the time reduction is notified by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player is in an advantageous state depending on the slide timing of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (big hit with the time reduction). ) Can be obtained.

That is, based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect is the time-saving gaming state, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 Therefore, the game ball T can be accepted by the V winning opening 1156 depending on the driving operation at the timing when the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened. Then, the probability of becoming a big hit with no time reduction and a big hit with a time reduction does not change by the lottery, but the probability of becoming a big hit with a time reduction can be increased by notifying that the game state after the big hit game is the time reduction game state (V). By accepting the game ball T in the winning opening 1156, a jackpot with a time reduction can be obtained), and further, the player himself can continuously obtain a jackpot with a time reduction.

Further, as described above, in the time-saving game state, when the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches 80 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the player waits until the number of times the variable display reaches 80 times. The steering wheel device 500 is used to perform a driving operation so that the game ball T is not accepted by the V winning opening 1156. For this reason, it is possible to provide a novel game playability different from the monotonous game playability of simply operating the handle device 500 and waiting for a big hit as in the conventional time-saving game, so that the interest can be improved.

Specifically, if the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner during the time-saving game state is less than 80 times, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, the player V until the number of times the variable display reaches 80 times. If the game ball is accepted in the winning opening 1156, it is not possible to know whether the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state or the time-saving game state. Therefore, if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the number of times the variable display is made reaches 80 times, the game state after the big hit game may be the normal game state depending on the lottery result. .. On the other hand, if the game state after the big hit game is the time-saving game state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than that in the normal game state, which is advantageous for the player.

That is, since the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of times the symbol variation is displayed reaches 80 times during the time-saving game state, it occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect. Based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the time-saving game state, the V winning opening 1156 may accept the game ball depending on the driving operation at the timing when the accessory winning opening 1155 opens. it can. That is, the player can get a big hit with a time saving by his own driving operation.

For this reason, when a jackpot with a time reduction is obtained by accepting a game ball in the V winning opening 1156, even if the jackpot game ends, the symbol variation is displayed 100 times during the time reduction game, which is higher than the normal game state. Since the probability of becoming a big hit is high and it is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state, the player has a handle device so that the game ball T is not accepted in the V winning opening 1156 until the number of variable display reaches 80 times. The driving operation will be performed at 500.

In this way, when the time-saving game is started and the number of times the symbol variation is displayed reaches 80 times, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the V winning opening is reached until the number of symbol variation display reaches 80 times. The player who performs the driving operation so that the game ball is not accepted at 1156 acquires the benefit that the advantage suggestion effect is executed while taking a risk. In addition, it is lost to the player who cannot accept the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 even though the driving operation is performed so that the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 during the time-saving game state. The feeling can be reduced. Further, even if the player receives the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 before the time-saving game is started after the big hit game and the number of times the symbol variation is displayed reaches 80 times, the time-saving big hit and the time-saving Since the probability of being determined by lottery does not change with the big hit, fairness can be guaranteed.

Then, during the period when the advantage suggestion effect is executed (the period when the time-saving game is started and the number of times the symbol variation is displayed reaches 80 times, the remaining 20 times), the jackpot with time reduction can always be obtained. This is not the case (when the number of times the time-saving game is started and the variable display of the symbol reaches 80 times, it is not always possible to win the big hit with time-saving with the remaining 20 times), and the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156. Even if you try not to do so, you will not necessarily be able to make a big profit (because it is not guaranteed that you will get a big hit with a short time), so you will have high expectations for getting a big hit with a short time. This will increase your interest. However, since the probability inside the game machine does not change (the probability of winning a big hit without time reduction and a big hit with time reduction does not change), it does not greatly incite gambling.

In addition, when the time-saving big hit is acquired and the time-saving game is started again after the big hit game and the number of times the pattern variation is displayed reaches 80 times, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed again, so that the player himself / herself again. It is possible to obtain a big hit with a short time by the driving operation. In this way, by performing the driving operation based on the advantage suggestion effect, the player can continuously obtain the jackpot with a reduced time.

When the time saving game is started, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed during the time saving game state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in an area other than the area where the symbol is displayed (decorative symbol is displayed) ( (Not shown), the player can clearly grasp the number of times the variable display is made during the time-saving game state while paying attention to the symbol showing the lottery result.

In the fourth embodiment described above, assuming that "a predetermined condition is satisfied", the player advances the game by performing a driving operation so as not to accept the game ball into the V winning opening 1156 during the time-saving game. Therefore, the case where the number of fluctuation display of the symbol during the time-saving game reaches 80 times without being in the big hit game state has been described, but the game is performed so that the player does not accept the game ball into the V winning opening 1156 during the time-saving game. If the conditions intended by the player (where the player can be involved) are satisfied, such as when the player has won the small hit 60 times, the change can be made as appropriate. Although not limited to the above 80 times, the timing (period) for starting the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is such that the number of times that the jackpot with time reduction is notified is 1 to 3 times. Is desirable. That is, it is desirable that the number of times the game ball T can be accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is 1 to 3 times, which is not the number of times that the game ball T can be accepted.

Further, the case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the symbol is fluctuated 80 times during the time-saving game state has been described, but it is not limited to 80 times. However, based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is started and the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect is the time saving game state. In order to secure a period in which the player can perform the driving operation multiple times at the timing when the character winning opening 1155 opens, the number of times the symbol changes during the time-saving game is 80 times, 50 times without becoming a big hit game state. It may be the case when the number of times reaches 30 times.

Then, the number of variable display times of the symbol during the time-saving game state can be randomly determined from a plurality of variable display times. Specifically, for example, the number of times of 1 is randomly determined from 80 times, 50 times, and 30 times. The number of times may be determined at the start of the time-saving game, or may be determined when the game ball T is received at the second starting port 1153 (or the first starting port 1152) during the time-saving game. .. Further, when the number of times is randomly determined, the determined number of times may be notified to the player, or the determined number of times may not be notified to the player.

Further, when the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is determined, the game ball T is accepted for each variation display of the symbol (the second start port 1153 (may be the first start port 1152)) during the subsequent time-saving game state. Every), it may be decided whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect, and the advantage suggestion effect may be executed based on this decision.

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the advantage suggestion effect, a period during which the advantage suggestion effect is likely to be executed and a period during which the advantage suggestion effect is difficult to be executed are provided in the subsequent time-saving game state (the game period and execution that are always executed). It may be a game period that is not played), and new playability can be added. That is, when the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the symbol is fluctuated 80 times during the time saving game state, it is not necessary to continuously execute the advantage suggestion effect in the remaining 20 times of the time saving game state.

For example, when the advantageous suggestion effect is executed from 80 times out of 100 times of the time saving game, it is difficult to execute 80 to 85 times, 86 to 90 times is easy to be executed, and 91 to 95 times is difficult to be executed. It may be easy to execute 86 to 100 times.

Further, as described above, when the number of fluctuations in the time-saving gaming state that triggers the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is randomly determined, for example, when it is determined to be 30, it is executed 31 to 40 times. It may be difficult to execute 41 to 60 times, it may be difficult to execute 61 to 80 times, and it may be easy to execute 81 to 100 times.

As described above, even if there is a period during which the advantage suggestion effect is likely to be executed and a period during which it is difficult to execute, the timing (period) such that the number of times that the jackpot with a short time is notified is 1 to 3 times. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the game, and since the feasible period of the advantage suggestion effect is longer than other fluctuation times as in the case where the fluctuation number is determined to be 30, today Since the player can be made to think that he / she is lucky, he / she can improve his / her expectation for winning the jackpot with a short time.

As described above, the case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of fluctuations of the symbol during the time-saving game reaches 80 times without accepting the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 has been described. It is possible to change the continuation mode of the advantage suggestion effect in the subsequent time-saving game. For example, if the number of fluctuations is between 80 and 90 during the time-saving game related to the first hit, the number of fluctuations of the symbol during the time-saving game will be 80 times in the subsequent games. When it reaches, the advantage suggestion effect is executed, but if the number of fluctuations becomes a big hit game with a time reduction between 91 times and 100 times during the time reduction game related to the first hit, the time reduction game in the subsequent games It can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect when the number of fluctuations of the symbol inside reaches 50 times. With this configuration, the player tries to obtain a jackpot game with a time reduction between 91 and 100 fluctuations, but the player plays in the V winning opening 1156 between 91 and 100 fluctuations. You can be thrilled if you can accept the ball.

Furthermore, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect can be changed in the subsequent games depending on the number of fluctuations in the time-saving game state until the big hit game with time-saving. For example, during the time-saving game related to the first hit, if the number of fluctuations of the symbol during the time-saving game becomes a big hit game by 85 times without accepting the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156, the next time-saving game is in progress. Only in, the advantage suggestion effect is executed. In addition, during the time-saving game related to the first hit, if the number of fluctuations of the symbol during the time-saving game is 95 times or more without accepting the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156, the next time-saving game is included. It can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect in all five time-saving games. With this configuration, for example, when the advantageous suggestion effect is scheduled to be executed in the five time-saving games including the next time-saving game, there is no time saving during the next time-saving game of the time-saving game related to the first hit. Even if it becomes a big hit and it becomes a normal game state after the big hit game, if it becomes a big hit with a time reduction, an advantage suggestion effect is executed, and the player expects that the big hit with a time reduction may be continuously obtained. It can be held and the operating rate can be improved.

As described above, in the case where "a predetermined condition is satisfied", the player advances the game so as not to accept the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156 during the time-saving game, so that the game does not become a big hit game state. It is a novel that the playability changes depending on the player by assuming that the condition that the player can be involved is satisfied, such as when the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the time-saving game reaches 80 times. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be realized, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, when "a predetermined condition is satisfied", the player advances the game so as not to accept the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 during the time-saving game, so that the time-saving game is performed without becoming a big hit game state. The case where the number of times of variation display of the symbol reaches 80 times has been described, but it may be the case where the lottery result is shown 80 times by the special symbol or the normal symbol on the function display 1114 during the time saving game state. It may be the case that the lottery related to the game is performed 80 times without being in the big hit game state.

Further, although the case of the steering wheel device 500 has been described as the “operating means”, the advantage suggestion effect is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operating unit that can be operated by the player such as the pressing operation unit 405. can do. For example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the time saving game is executed 100 times without executing the advantage suggestion effect, but when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the advantage suggesting effect is executed, but the time saving game is executed. There is a possibility that a loss will occur for the player, such as executing 20 times, but there is a possibility that a profit beyond the loss will be obtained by being able to obtain the benefit that the advantage suggestion effect is executed by the operation. It can be configured so that it can be expected to be.

The operation timing of the pressing operation unit 405 and the like (the timing for determining whether to execute the time-saving game 100 times without executing the advantage suggestion effect or to execute the advantage suggestion effect but to execute the time-saving game 20 times) is determined. It can be the start of the jackpot game state or the start of the time-saving game. Even with such a configuration, since it is possible to realize a novel pachinko machine 1 in which the playability changes depending on the player, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in addition to executing the advantage suggestion effect when the number of times the symbol changes is displayed reaches 80 times by advancing the game so as not to accept the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 during the time-saving game. When the pressing operation unit 405 or the like can be pressed 100 times in one game (for example, from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol), the advantage suggestion effect is executed. Can be configured in. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel pachinko machine 1 in which the playability changes.

(Fifth Embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration, operation, and the like in the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Since the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. .. Further, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

[1. Technical Thought of Fifth Embodiment of the Present Invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention can be represented as the following technical idea 1.
A launching means that can launch a game medium within the gaming area,
Lottery means to draw lots for games and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the passage control means for controlling the passage allowed state in which the game medium can pass through the special area in the game area, and
A payout means capable of paying out at least one more game medium than the number of game media that have passed through the special area.
A specific area detecting means for detecting that the game medium has passed through the specific area provided in the predetermined area, and
A profit-giving control means for controlling a profit-giving state in which a profit is given when the passage of the game medium is detected by the specific area detecting means, and
The lottery result is obtained by the lottery means that the specific result and the gaming state after the end of the profit-giving state can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times. Provided with an advantageous notification means capable of notifying that the advantageous gaming state can be controlled when the game is played.
The advantageous notification means can execute the notification within the minimum number of times of the lottery that can be notified after the control is started in the advantageous state.
A game machine featuring.

In the game machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the launching means (for example, the handle device 500) launches the game medium (for example, the game ball T) in the game area, and the lottery means (for example, the main control board 1113). Performs a lottery related to the game (for example, the random number update process in step S1) (for example, the lottery is performed when the game ball T is received at the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153).

The passage control means (for example, main control board 1113, accessory winning solenoid 1225, V winning solenoid 1232) is placed in a special area in the game area when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a small hit). It is controlled so that the game medium can pass through (for example, the movement of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 and the rotating body 1236 is controlled so that the game medium can be accepted into the receiving portion 1246a and the V winning opening 1156. ), The payout means (for example, the main control board 1113) can pay out at least one more game medium than the number of game media that have passed through the special area.

The specific area detecting means (for example, the main control board 1113, the V winning opening sensor 1239) detects that the game medium has passed through the specific area provided in the predetermined area, and the profit-giving control means (for example, the main control board). 1113) controls the profit-giving state (for example, a big hit) to give a profit when the passage of the game medium is detected by the specific area detecting means, and the advantageous notification means (peripheral control board 1116) is operated by the lottery means. A lottery result is obtained that is a specific result and that the game state after the end of the profit-giving state can be controlled to an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times. If so, it notifies that it is possible to control the advantageous gaming state.

Then, the advantageous notification means (peripheral control board 1116) executes notification within the minimum number of lottery times that can be notified after the control is started in the advantageous state (for example, first after the time saving game is started). When the game state after the big hit game is controlled to the time-saving game state, a lottery is drawn (hereinafter, the advantage suggestion effect is executed only when the game state is changed to the time-saving big hit).

As a conventional game machine, a type 1 pachinko machine that shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player when the main digital is in a specific mode, and a game ball that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through a specific area due to an opening such as a movable piece. There is known a one-kind two-kind multifunction device that mixes the two elements of the old two-kind pachinko machine that shifts to the gaming state.

However, since it is not new to use a 1-type / 2-type multifunction device such as the above-mentioned game machine, it is becoming difficult to satisfy a player who seeks further game entertainment.

In addition, in the 1-type and 2-type multifunction devices, there are more game balls that are paid out based on the game balls that have been won by small hits, etc., than the game balls that are required to advance the game in the time-saving game state. The number of game balls may increase as the game progresses in the state, and in order to obtain many game balls using this specification, it is possible to obtain a big hit from the middle to the end of the time-saving game state (after that, in the time-saving game state). There is a player who performs a technical intervention (so-called V removal) such that a driving operation is performed so as not to accept the game ball in the V winning opening until the number of fluctuations is appropriate in consideration. For this reason, there is a big difference in the profits obtained between the player who can perform the technical intervention such as V removal and the player who cannot perform the technical intervention, and there is a problem that the fairness of the profits between the players cannot be guaranteed. appear.

Further, if a profit that would not be obtained by a normal game method is generated as described above, the game hall where the game machine is installed will suffer damage as much as the profit is generated. Then, if measures are taken to prevent the amusement park from performing technical intervention such as V removal, measures are taken not only for players who can perform technical intervention such as V removal, but also for players who cannot perform technical intervention such as V removal. There is a risk that the damage caused by the above will be caused and the overall interest will be reduced even if technical intervention is not possible.

Therefore, according to the present invention, the lottery result is a specific result, and the gaming state after the end of the profit-giving state can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times. Is obtained, the fact that the advantageous gaming state can be controlled is notified within the minimum number of lottery that can be notified after the control is started in the advantageous state. Details will be described later.

In the fifth embodiment of the present invention described below, if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. A case will be described in which the advantage suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the game state after the generated big hit game is the time-saving game state is executed only once in the time-saving game.

That is, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 rotates the rotating body 1236 (from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right direction shown in FIG. 124 (b). It is suggested only once in the time-saving game whether or not the type 2 big hit that occurs if the V winning opening 1156 is accepted by rotating to the position) is a time-saving big hit.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention can be represented as the following technical idea 2.
Lottery means to draw lots for games and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, it is controlled so that the game medium can pass through the special area in the game area, and the predetermined period or the special area is predetermined. Passage control means that terminates control of the pass allowed state based on the passage of a number of game media, and
A payout means capable of paying out at least one more game medium for each one of the passed game media based on the number of game media that have passed through the special area.
A specific area detecting means for detecting that the game medium has passed through the specific area provided in the predetermined area, and
A profit-giving control means for controlling a profit-giving state in which a profit is given when the passage of the game medium is detected by the specific area detecting means, and
The lottery means controls the game state, which is the specific result and after the end of the profit-giving state, to an advantageous game state in which the ratio of the specific result and the lottery is more advantageous than the normal game state while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times. When the lottery result that it is possible is obtained, it is provided with an advantageous notification means that can notify that the advantageous gaming state can be controlled.
The advantageous notification means executes the notification within the minimum number of times of the lottery that can be notified after the control is started in the advantageous state, and executes the notification a small number of times (including once). Even if it is drawn that the result of the lottery can be notified during the subsequent advantageous state, the notification is not executed.
A game machine featuring.

[2. Processing by the main control board and processing by the peripheral control board]
The process according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention executes a process substantially the same as the process by the main control board and the process by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times that the liquid crystal display device 1115 stops and displays the symbol indicating the lottery result during the time-saving game state is cumulatively stored in the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116. The remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is displayed based on the number of times stored (cumulative number of fluctuations).

In the following fifth embodiment of the present invention, the game ball T is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect only when the lottery result is the first big hit with the time saving after the time saving game is started. A case will be described in which the player is notified only once that the game state after the big hit game that occurs if is accepted is the time-saving game state.

When the time saving game is started in the peripheral control board 1116, the number of times the decorative symbol is changedly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 after the time saving game is started based on the fluctuation start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309 ( The cumulative number of fluctuations) is counted by the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116.

Then, when the lottery result is a big hit with a time reduction for the first time after the time reduction game is started, the peripheral control board 1116 displays the effect image of the lamp lit on the liquid crystal display device 1115 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). By displaying, it is said that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving gaming state, that is, the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156. Then, an advantage suggestion effect is executed to notify the player that there is a time reduction in the jackpot that occurs.

In addition, if the advantage suggestion effect is executed once, even if the lottery in which the advantage suggestion effect is executed does not obtain a big hit with a time reduction, the lottery result is again a big hit with a time reduction during the simultaneous short game. Even if it becomes, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed. That is, only when the lottery result is the big hit with the time saving for the first time after the time saving game is started, if the game ball T is accepted by the V winning opening 1156 for the player, the big hit that occurs is the big hit with the time saving. Notify that there is.

Then, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the cumulative number of fluctuations until the time-saving game ends, and based on this count, displays the cumulative number of fluctuations on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like so that the player can see the time-saving game from the start. Notify the number of fluctuations. However, in order for the player to more clearly grasp the end timing of the time-saving game, it is desirable to display the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving game based on the counted cumulative number of fluctuations (for example, it has changed 30 times from the start of the time-saving game). In that case, it is displayed that it fluctuates 70 times remaining).

Further, the peripheral control board 1116 is used when the time-saving game ends (when the variable display is performed 100 times) or when the game state shifts from the time-saving game state to the jackpot game state before the time-saving game ends. Clears the cumulative number of fluctuations counted. Then, when the game state shifts and the time saving game is started again, the peripheral control board 1116 counts the cumulative number of fluctuations in the RAM again.

By configuring the cumulative fluctuation count to be backed up, the cumulative fluctuation count can be continuously counted even when the power supply is cut off.

In addition, each time the time saving game is executed, the advantage suggestion effect can be executed only in the case of the first big hit with the time saving after the time saving game is started.

In this way, the peripheral control board 1116 executes the advantage suggestion effect only when the lottery result is the first big hit with the time saving after the time saving game starts, so that the game ball T is inserted into the V winning opening 1156. It suggests to the player only once that the gaming state after the jackpot game that occurs if is accepted is the time-saving gaming state.

[3. Characteristic effects, etc. of the fifth embodiment of the present invention]
The fifth embodiment of the present invention described above has the same effects as those in the first and second embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following effects.

In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, since the presence or absence of the time reduction is notified by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the advantageous state (big hit with the time reduction) is continued depending on the driving timing of the game ball T of the player. Can be obtained.

That is, the opening and closing of the prize winning opening is based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect is the time-saving game state. Since the game ball T can be accepted by the V winning opening 1156 by the driving operation in which the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened by the member 1221, the player can continuously obtain a big hit with a time saving. It is possible to add a new playability that makes it possible.

In particular, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, many prize balls can be obtained by performing a driving operation so as not to accept the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 until the final stage of the time-saving game state ( In a so-called V-removable gaming machine, a time-saving jackpot is obtained based on an advantageous suggestion effect that is executed only when the lottery result is the first time-saving jackpot after the start of the time-saving game. Since it is far more advantageous for the player to continuously obtain the jackpot with a time saving, the player performs a driving operation to make the V winning opening 1156 accept the game ball T based on the advantageous suggestion effect. Therefore, it becomes difficult to capture such as removing V.

In detail, the advantage suggestion effect is executed only when the lottery result is the big hit with the time saving for the first time after the time saving game is started, and the big hit that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156. It suggests to the player only once that the game state after the game is the time-saving game state. If the jackpot with a time reduction is not obtained based on this one suggestion, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed thereafter during the time reduction game state, so that the player receives the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156. If so, it is not possible to grasp whether the game state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal game state or the time-saving game state.

For this reason, the player is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game, which occurs if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 notified only once during the time-saving game state of 1, is the time-saving game state. Based on the above, the game is performed by performing the driving operation at the timing when the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened.

In this way, in order to notify the player that the game state after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 only once during the time-saving game state of 1, is the time-saving game state. It will be a chance for you to get a big hit with a short time. For this reason, the player seriously tries to accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156 in order to obtain a big hit with a time saving, and the time saving game is completed with a small number of games.

Then, since the time-saving game is completed with a small number of games, it becomes difficult to perform a technical intervention to perform a driving operation so as not to accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156, and the V is removed by the technical intervention. It is possible to ensure the fairness of profits between the players who can and cannot.

Further, since the advantage suggestion effect is executed once in the time-saving game, the game state after the jackpot game that occurs when the advantage suggestion effect is executed and the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving game state. It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the notification that there is.

Further, the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by the driving operation performed based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted into the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving gaming state. The player can be thrilled about whether or not T is accepted.

In particular, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, when the lottery result is the first time-saving big hit after the start of the time-saving game, the advantage suggestion effect is executed once, so that the player can get the time-saving big hit. It will be a chance that you can definitely get it. As a result, there is room or hesitation to remove the so-called V in order to obtain a large number of prize balls by performing a driving operation so that the V winning opening 1156 does not accept the game ball T until the end of the time-saving game state. If the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 without giving, the driving operation can be prompted based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the time-saving game state.

In addition, a penalty is given to the player who performs the so-called V removal, and a structure is provided in the V winning opening 1156 to prevent the V removal so that the V removal cannot be performed. Instead of trying not to do so, the player will play the game so that he does not remove the V himself.

The number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time-saving game state (the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner) is displayed in an area other than the area where the symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. With the configuration (not shown), the player can clearly grasp the number of times the symbol is variablely displayed while paying attention to the symbol showing the lottery result.

In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the game ball T is accepted into the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect only when the lottery result is the first big hit with the time saving after the time saving game is started. Although the case where the game state after the jackpot game that occurs if the game is played is suggested to the player only once that the game state is the time-saving game state is described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect twice when the lottery result is a big hit with a time reduction at the first time and the next time after the time reduction game starts, and after the time reduction game starts. It can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect three times when the lottery result is a big hit with a time saving in the first, the next time, and the next time.

When the advantage suggestion effect is executed multiple times as described above when the advantage suggestion effect is executed twice or when the advantage suggestion effect is executed three times, the player is given an advantage suggestion effect. By not notifying the number of times the game is executed, it is possible to make the player think that it may be one chance and to seriously make the V winning opening 1156 accept the game ball T from the beginning.

Further, when the advantage suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times and the player is not notified of the number of times the advantage suggestion effect is executed, the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 based on the first advantage suggestion effect. By executing the advantage suggestion effect again in a state of being disappointed that the advantage suggestion effect cannot be executed anymore, it is possible to give a surprise hit and greatly expand the sense of expectation at once.

When executing the advantage suggestion effect a plurality of times, the number of times may be executed by lottery. Further, if the V winning opening 1156 cannot accept the game ball T based on the first advantage suggestion effect, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect next time. Further, if the V winning opening 1156 cannot accept the game ball T based on the next advantage suggestion effect, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect one after another by lottery.

However, when the advantage suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the lottery is first drawn from the start of the execution of the advantage suggestion effect so as not to give the V winning opening 1156 room for a driving operation so as not to accept the game ball T. It is decided to execute the advantage suggestion effect when the result is a jackpot with a time reduction multiple times including the case where the jackpot with a time reduction is obtained, and the expected number of times the jackpot with a time reduction can be obtained (1 to 3 times). It is desirable to execute the advantage suggestion effect based on.

In other words, if the player is given many opportunities to win the time-saving jackpot, the player who can remove the V should only win the time-saving jackpot at the last opportunity among the opportunities to obtain the time-saving jackpot. Thinking that, V will be removed until the last opportunity, and the profit given to the player will be large.

Then, as described above, by executing the advantage suggestion effect only once during the time-saving game state of 1, the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is changed. When the notification that the game is in the time-saving game state is made, the driving operation is immediately performed so that the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, and as a result, the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156. The time-saving game ends and the big hit game starts with a small number of games. In this way, by executing the advantage suggestion effect only once during the time-saving game state of 1, the time-saving game is completed with a small number of games, so there is no room for V removal, and there are many cases due to V removal. It is possible to suppress the over-profit of getting the prize ball.

In addition, "it becomes possible to notify after the control is started in an advantageous state" means that it is possible to notify because the lottery result is the first big hit with a time reduction after the control is started in the time saving game state. In addition, the "number of lottery times as small as possible" is based on the expected number (1 to 3 times) that a jackpot with a time reduction can be obtained after being controlled to the time reduction game state, and the lottery result has a time reduction. Three times including the first lottery.

(Sixth Embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration, operation, and the like in the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Since the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. .. Further, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

[1. Technical Thought of the Sixth Embodiment of the Present Invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
A launching means that can launch a game medium within the gaming area,
Preliminary judgment means to draw lots for games when certain lottery conditions are met,
Based on the lottery result by the pre-determination means, a passage control means for controlling a specific area in the game area to a pass allowable state through which the game medium can pass, and
A profit-giving state control means for controlling a profit-giving state in which a profit is given when the game medium passes through the specific area, and
A post-granting state control means capable of controlling either a normal state or an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state based on the lottery result after the end of the profit-giving state.
While being controlled to the advantageous state, whether the game medium is passed through the specific area is controlled to the advantageous state after the profit giving state, or is controlled to the advantageous state from the recognizable acquisition state with notification. An advantage acquisition expectation maintenance means that can control the state without notification, which is difficult to grasp, and then control the acquisition state with notification again.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the game machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the launching means (for example, the handle device 500) launches the game medium (for example, the game ball T) in the game area, and the pre-determination means (for example, the main control board 11139). Performs a lottery related to the game (for example, the random number update process in step S1) when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied (for example, when the game ball T is accepted in the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153).

The passage control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the accessory winning solenoid 1225, the V winning solenoid 1232) is a specific area in the game area (for example, the receiving portion 1246a, the V winning opening) based on the lottery result by the pre-determination means. 1156) is controlled to allow passage through which the game medium can pass (for example, the movement of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 and the rotating body 1236 is controlled), and the profit-giving state control means (for example, the main control board 1113) is used. , The profit-giving state (for example, the jackpot game state) in which the profit is given when the game medium passes through the specific area is controlled, and the state control means after the grant (for example, the main control board 1113) ends the profit-giving state. Later, based on the lottery result, it is controlled to either a normal state or an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal state.

Then, it is possible to grasp whether the advantage acquisition expectation maintaining means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116) is controlled to the advantageous state after the profit giving state when the game medium is passed through the specific region while being controlled to the advantageous state. It is controlled from the notification acquisition state to the advantageous state or the notification non-state which is difficult to grasp, and then controlled again to the notification acquisition state (for example, a jackpot that occurs when a game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156). (Variable whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect that notifies the state after the game).

As a conventional game machine, a type 1 pachinko machine that shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player when the main digital is in a specific mode, and a game ball that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through a specific area due to an opening such as a movable piece. There is known a type 1 and type 2 multifunction device that aims to diversify the game by mixing the two elements of the old type 2 pachinko machine that shifts to the game state.

However, although the game is diversified by using a 1-type / 2-type multifunction device such as the above-mentioned game machine, there are not a few players who get tired of the game and lose their interest.

In addition, in the 1st and 2nd type multifunction devices, most of the players who are in the short-time game just hit the right side to shoot the game ball into the right side area of the game area and wait for a big hit. , The game tends to be monotonous, and there is a risk that the interest will decline.

Therefore, in the present invention, while being controlled to the advantageous state, when the game medium is passed through the specific area, it is controlled to the advantageous state from the notified acquisition state in which it can be grasped whether the profit-giving state is controlled to the advantageous state. The interest is improved by adding a new game property of controlling the state without notification, which is difficult to grasp, and then controlling the state with notification again.

It should be noted that "when the game medium is passed through a specific area, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state after the profit-giving state, or it is controlled from the acquisition state with notification that can be grasped to the advantageous state, or it is controlled to the no notification state that is difficult to grasp, and then In the case of "controlling to the notification acquisition state again", in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the time saving game state is 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, 91 times to 100 times. During the small hit game, after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the judgment result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game. A case of executing an advantage suggestion effect that suggests to the player whether the gaming state of the above is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state will be described.

That is, when the number of times the symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 reaches 50 times during the time-saving game state, the game is received by the receiving unit 1236a by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit. If the ball T is accepted into the V winning opening 1156 by rotating the rotating body 1236 (rotating from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right pointing position shown in FIG. 124 (b)), two kinds of big hits will occur. Start suggesting whether or not it is a big hit with a short time (start executing the advantage suggestion effect). Then, when the number of times the symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 reaches 90 times during the time-saving game state, the started suggestion ends (execution of the advantage suggestion effect ends).

[2. Processing by the main control board and processing by the peripheral control board]
The process according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention executes a process substantially the same as the process by the main control board and the process by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times that the liquid crystal display device 1115 stops and displays the symbol indicating the lottery result during the time-saving game state is cumulatively stored in the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116. Based on the number of times stored (cumulative number of fluctuations), the execution of the advantageous suggestion effect is started, or the execution of the advantageous suggestion effect is terminated.

In the following sixth embodiment of the present invention, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed when the number of fluctuations since the start of the time-saving game is 1 to 30 times, and the number of fluctuations is advantageous when the number of fluctuations is 31 to 40 times. The suggestion effect is executed, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed when the number of fluctuations is 41 to 60 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of fluctuations is 61 to 70 times, and the number of fluctuations is 71 to 90 times. The case where the advantage suggestion effect is not executed up to the first time and the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of fluctuations is 91 to 100 times will be described.

Specifically, the peripheral control board 1116 is the number of times (cumulative) that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 after the time saving game is started, based on the fluctuation start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309. The number of fluctuations) is counted by the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116.

Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the game state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267 to determine whether or not the cumulative number of fluctuations counted in the RAM has reached 30 times.

When it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 30 times, the peripheral control board 1116 starts executing the advantage suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 30 times, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and the game ball T is placed in the V winning opening 1156. If the game state after the jackpot game that would occur if accepted is the time-saving game state, the effect image of the lamp that is off is changed to the effect image of the lamp that is on for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). As a result, if the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, the gaming state after the big hit game is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, that is, the V winning opening 1156 When the game ball is accepted, the player is notified for each small hit whether or not there is a time reduction in the big hit that occurs, and the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is started.

Then, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the cumulative number of fluctuations, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM has reached 40.

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 40, the peripheral control board 1116 ends the execution of the advantage suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 40, the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is hidden (not shown), and the game ball T is placed in the V winning opening 1156. If it is accepted, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect that notifies the player of whether or not there is a time reduction in the big hit that occurs for each small hit is completed.

Further, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the cumulative number of fluctuations, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM has reached 60.

When it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 60, the peripheral control board 1116 starts executing the advantage suggestion effect. That is, based on the lottery result related to the 61st change, the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the above-mentioned advantage suggestion effect before the 61st change is started. Then, it informs whether there is a time reduction in the big hit that occurs.

Then, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the cumulative number of fluctuations, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM has reached 70.

When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 70, the peripheral control board 1116 ends the execution of the advantage suggestion effect. That is, as described above, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is completed by hiding the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115.

Further, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the cumulative number of fluctuations, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM has reached 90.

When it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 90, the peripheral control board 1116 starts executing the advantage suggestion effect. That is, by executing the advantage suggestion effect as described above, it is notified whether or not there is a time reduction in the big hit that occurs if the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156.

Then, when the cumulative number of fluctuations reaches 100, the peripheral control board 1116 ends the execution of the advantage suggestion effect, and clears the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM. It should be noted that the cumulative number of fluctuations is also cleared even when the game shifts to the jackpot game state before the number of times the symbol is variablely displayed after the start of the time-saving game reaches 100 times. That is, as described above, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is completed by hiding the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115.

By providing a configuration that backs up the cumulative number of fluctuations, the cumulative number of fluctuations can be continuously counted even when the power is cut off during the time-saving game state.

In addition, every time the time-saving game is executed, the number of times the symbol changes in the time-saving game state is changed from 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times without executing the advantage suggestion effect. It can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect in the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, and 91 to 100 times of the display number of times. That is, it can be configured to always execute the advantage suggestion effect in the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, and 91 to 100 times of the variable display number each time the time saving game is executed. ..

In this way, the peripheral control board 1116 starts the execution of the advantage suggestion effect or ends the execution of the advantage suggestion effect based on the counted cumulative number of fluctuations. As a result, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed when the number of fluctuations from the start of the time saving game is 1 to 30 times, and the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of fluctuations is 31 to 40 times. However, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed from 41 to 60 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of fluctuations is 61 to 70 times, and the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of fluctuations is 71 to 90 times. It is not executed, and the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of fluctuations is 91 to 100 times, and the advantage suggestion effect is intermittently executed.

[3. Characteristic effects of the sixth embodiment of the present invention]
The sixth embodiment of the present invention described above has the same effects as those in the first to third embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following effects.

In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, since the presence or absence of the time reduction is notified by executing the advantage suggestion effect in the intermittent period, the player is in an advantageous state depending on the slide timing of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. (Big hit with time reduction) can be continuously obtained.

That is, based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect executed in the intermittent period is the time-saving game state. , The player can make the V winning opening 1156 accept the game ball T by the driving operation at the timing when the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened by the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221, so that the player himself can make a big hit with a time saving. Can be continuously obtained.

Further, in the time-saving game state, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed from 1 to 30 times when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the advantage suggestion effect is executed from 31 to 40 times, and 41 to 60 times. The advantage suggestion effect is not executed from 61 times to 70 times, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed from 71 times to 90 times, and the advantage suggestion effect is executed from 91 times to 100 times. Since the sexual suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to change the playability during the time-saving game state.

In other words, the player won the V prize because the advantage suggestion effect was not executed during the period when the number of times the symbol was fluctuated and displayed in the time-saving game state was 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times. If the game ball T is accepted in the mouth 1156, it is not possible to grasp whether the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state or the time-saving game state. Therefore, the player performs a driving operation so that the game ball T is not accepted in the V winning opening 1156 during the period when the advantage suggestion effect is not executed.

However, since the advantage suggestion effect is executed during the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, and 91 to 100 times when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the time-saving game state, the player has a V winning opening 1156. If the game ball T is accepted, it becomes possible to grasp whether the game state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal game state or the time-saving game state. Therefore, the player plays a role by the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving gaming state. The V winning opening 1156 attempts to accept the game ball T by performing a driving operation that matches the timing at which the winning opening 1155 opens.

In this way, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed during the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times of the variation display number of the symbol in the time-saving game state, and the variation display number is 31 times. Since the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the period of 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, and 91 times to 100 times, the player's driving operation is different (the game ball T is not accepted in the V winning opening 1156). (The driving operation is performed so that the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156), and the game performance during the time-saving game state can be changed.

Further, in order to start the execution of the advantage suggestion effect in the middle of the time-saving game and end the execution of the advantage suggestion effect in the middle of the time-saving game, the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the middle of the time-saving game and the V winning opening 1156 It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the notification that the game state after the big hit game, which occurs if the game ball T is accepted, is the time-saving game state.

Further, the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by the driving operation performed based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted into the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving gaming state. The player can be thrilled about whether or not T is accepted.

In particular, in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed during the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times of the variation display number, and the variation display number is 31 times. In the period of 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, and 91 times to 100 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed.

That is, the number of fluctuations in which the game is becoming monotonous due to the progress of the game without winning a big hit during the time-saving game is set to about 30 times, and the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect. The notification of whether or not the game state after the big hit game that occurs is the time saving game state is based on the expected number (1 to 2 times) that the big hit with time saving can be obtained by setting the number of fluctuations to about 10 times. , The period during which the advantage suggestion effect is executed and the period during which the advantage suggestion effect is not executed are set.

Then, during the period when the number of variable display times is 1 to 30 times, 41 times to 60 times, and 71 times to 90 times, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, and the number of variable display times is 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times. By executing the advantage suggestion effect in the period of 91 to 100 times, there is a notification as to whether or not the game state after the big hit game is a time-saving game state, and no notification is alternately performed. , It is possible to attract the player to the game until the end during the time-saving game.

The number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time-saving game state (the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner) is displayed in an area other than the area where the symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. With the configuration (not shown), the player can clearly grasp the number of times the symbol is variablely displayed while paying attention to the symbol showing the lottery result.

Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed in the period when the number of times the symbol is variablely displayed in the time-saving game state is 1 to 30 times, 41 times to 60 times, and 71 times to 90 times. The case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, and 91 to 100 times of the variable display number of times has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this period. For example, in the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 70 times, and 81 to 100 times of the variable display number, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, and the variable display number is 31 to 40 times, 71 to 80 times. It can be configured to perform an advantage suggestion effect during the period of.

That is, the period during which the advantage suggestion effect is executed and the period during which the advantage suggestion effect is not executed can be appropriately changed, but as described above, the game progresses as the game progresses without obtaining a big hit during the time-saving game. The number of fluctuations that is becoming monotonous is set to about 30 times, and whether or not the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect is the time-saving game state. It is desirable to set the period based on the expected number (1 to 2 times) that a big hit with a time reduction can be obtained by setting the number of fluctuations to about 10 times.

Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed in the period when the number of times the symbol is variablely displayed in the time-saving game state is 1 to 30 times, 41 times to 60 times, and 71 times to 90 times. The case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the period when the number of times of variation display is 31 to 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, and 91 times to 100 times has been described, but whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect for each period It may be decided by lottery. Specifically, for example, before the number of variable display times reaches 31, 61, or 91 times, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect, and if it is decided to execute the advantage suggestion effect, the above period is used. It can be configured to perform an advantage suggestion effect. Further, before starting the time-saving game, it may be decided in advance by lottery which period of the above periods the advantage suggestion effect is to be executed.

Further, a plurality of patterns of periods for executing the advantage suggestion effect can be prepared, and one pattern can be determined from the plurality of patterns. Specifically, for example, in the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, 71 to 90 times, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, and the number of variable display times is 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, The first pattern that executes the advantage suggestion effect in the period of 91 to 100 times, and the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 70 times, and 81 to 100 times of the variation display number. Instead, prepare a second pattern that executes the advantage suggestion effect during the period when the number of variable display times is 31 to 40 times and 71 to 80 times, and randomly determine one pattern from these two patterns. Can be configured in.

The pattern may be determined when the game ball T is first received at the first start port 1152 (may be the second start port 1153) during the time-saving game state. By determining the execution pattern of the advantage suggestion effect by lottery in this way, it is possible to diversify the game.

When the pattern is randomly determined as described above, the determined pattern may be notified to the player. For example, when the above-mentioned first pattern is determined, there are more opportunities to execute the advantage suggestion effect than the above-mentioned second pattern, so that the player may be lucky today to perform the time-saving game. It is possible to improve the expectation for.

Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, it is advantageous that the number of times the symbol variation is displayed in the time-saving game state is 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times each time the time-saving game is executed. The case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed during the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, and 91 to 100 times of the variation display number without executing the sexual suggestion effect has been described, but during the time saving game state Whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect during this period may be determined by lottery before the time-saving game is started, or by lottery every predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) during the normal game state. You may decide whether or not to execute by. Then, for example, when the number of fluctuations is 500 and the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is determined, it is not necessary to execute the lottery as to whether or not to execute each subsequent number of fluctuations. Then, when it is decided to execute the game, the expectation for the time-saving game state can be improved by notifying the player before the time-saving game state is reached.

In addition, whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect in the above period during the time-saving game state is determined when a big hit is made with a specific symbol (for example, the symbol "7") or when a big hit is made with a specific reach. It may be decided when it becomes a big hit when the reach of a predetermined number of times is displayed. Further, it may be configured to determine the pattern for executing the advantage suggestion effect when the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is determined (either the first pattern or the second pattern as described above is determined). May be good). In this case, it is possible to improve the expectation for the game by making the player think that he / she is lucky today because the advantage effect is executed.

Further, when the pattern for executing the advantage suggestion effect is determined as described above, the advantage suggestion effect is executed before the time saving game is executed by notifying the player before the time saving game state is reached. You can increase your expectations for things.

In addition, by performing a count display that indicates that the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed during the time-saving game state, and that the execution of the advantage suggestion effect ends when the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed, the game is played. The person can improve the expectation that the advantage suggestion effect will be executed by displaying that the advantage suggestion effect will be executed after how many times the variable display is performed, and the advantage suggestion will be performed after the variable display many times. Since the display indicating that the execution of the effect is completed tries to obtain a big hit with a time reduction while the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, it is possible to be thrilled during the time reduction game.

(Other embodiments of the fourth to sixth embodiments of the present invention)
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like of the other embodiments of the fourth to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described. Since the pachinko machine 1 according to another embodiment has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth to sixth embodiments of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. And.

[1. Rotation mode of rotating body]
In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, the process of rotating the rotating body 1236 from the upward position (standby position) shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right direction position shown in FIG. 124 (b) is performed. The case where the game ball T received from the accessory winning opening 1155 to the receiving portion 1236a can be accepted by the V winning opening 1156 has been described above, but other rotation modes can be used.

Specifically, the rotating body 1236 is kept on standby at the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the rotating body 1236 is rotated to the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to receive the rotating body 1236. The game ball T can be made acceptable to the unit 1236a. Then, the player can be thrilled about whether or not the game ball T is accepted by the receiving portion 1236a by the opening / closing pattern of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 determined based on the small hit symbol random number. It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T and improve the interest of the player.

[2. Suggestion mode by advantage suggestion production]
In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, as an advantage suggestion effect, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is always displayed during the time-saving game (not shown), and the game is played on the V winning opening 1156. If the game state after the big hit game that occurs if the ball is accepted is the time saving game state, the presence or absence of the time saving can be determined by changing the effect image of the lamp that is off to the effect image of the lamp that is on. Although the case of notifying has been described, other modes can be used.

Specifically, if a small hit occurs during the time-saving game, after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. It is possible to display in characters such as "with time reduction!" Or "without time reduction!" Whether the game state of is a normal game state or a time reduction game state. In this way, it is possible to more clearly notify the player of the presence or absence of a time reduction by displaying the characters.

Further, by changing the color of the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of a time reduction. Specifically, if the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is a time-saving game state, the decorative pattern is displayed in rainbow color, which is different from the normal decorative pattern. By displaying in color, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of a time reduction while paying attention to the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the presence or absence of time reduction can be notified by making the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 different. Specifically, if the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the normal game state, the cat character is displayed, and the game state after the big hit game is shortened. By displaying the dog character in the game state, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of time reduction while diversifying the production mode.

In addition, the presence or absence of a time reduction can be notified by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player. Specifically, if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the pressing operation unit 405 is vibrated when the game state after the big hit game is the time-saving game state, and the game state after the big hit game is the normal game. It is possible to suppress actions such as the player hitting the glass unit 590 by vibrating more strongly, vibrating for a longer time, etc. in the time-saving game state than in the state.

That is, when notifying the presence or absence of a time reduction by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, many players operate the handle device 500 with the right hand in order to drive the game ball T into the game area 1100, and the left hand is the pressing operation unit. Since he is touching 405, both hands are occupied. In this state, it becomes difficult to hit the glass unit 590 in order to insert the game ball into the accessory winning opening 1155, the receiving portion 1236a, and the V winning opening 1156, so that damage to the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. can do.

In addition to the vibration, even if the presence or absence of the time reduction is notified by the air from the pressing operation unit 405, the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained.

[3. Continuation of advantage suggestion production]

In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, it may be determined whether or not the advantage suggestion effect is continuously executed in the time-saving game after the time-saving game related to the first hit according to a predetermined condition. For example, only when a predetermined condition is met at the time of the first hit (a big hit with a specific symbol, a big hit with a specific random number, a big hit with a specific reach, etc.) The advantage suggestion effect may be continuously executed up to 3 times of the time saving game after the inclusion. In addition, only when the predetermined conditions are met in the time saving game related to the first hit (when a small hit is made with a specific symbol, when a small hit is made with a specific random number, etc.), the time saving after the first hit is included. The advantage suggestion effect may be continuously executed up to three times in the game. By continuously executing the advantage suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to improve the expectation for the time-saving game related to the first hit, and it is possible to obtain a pachinko machine with new game characteristics.

(Effects of the embodiments of the present invention, etc.)
Whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect as in the above-described embodiment of the present invention is the time-saving gaming state. By notifying the player, the player can be attracted to the game. Specifically, since it is possible for the player to acquire the jackpot by himself / herself after obtaining the jackpot acquisition right in the 1-type / 2-type multifunction device (based on the lottery result, the V winning opening 1156 is made to accept the game ball T. (Because it is possible), whether or not the jackpot that can be obtained is a more advantageous jackpot (whether or not it is a jackpot with a short time) is important information, and since it influences the prize ball that can be obtained, it attracts players more. It is possible to provide a game machine to be attached.

In addition, in order to solve the problem that it is difficult to notice that it has become a big hit like the conventional type 1 and type 2 multifunction device, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) and background of the symbol are changed to make the V winning opening 1156. Even if the timing for accepting the game ball T is notified, the fluctuation time will be long, so there are many opportunities to obtain the big hit acquisition right, which is also a feature of the 1st and 2nd type multifunction devices, and the big hit after starting the time-saving game. It is not possible to take advantage of the characteristic that it takes a short time to obtain.

However, in the embodiment of the present invention, since the advantage suggestion effect is executed as described above, useful information (whether or not it is a big hit with a time saving) while making the best use of the characteristics of the above-mentioned type 1 and type 2 multifunction device. Can be given to the player. For this reason, it is possible to make the player aware that he / she can get a big hit and to attract the game, to avoid the situation where he / she is getting a big hit, and to entertain the game (act) of getting a big hit. Can be done.

Furthermore, in the 1st and 2nd type multifunction devices, the game ball T passes through the V winning opening due to the structure that it is difficult to understand that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening as a specific area. You may not realize that you got a big hit. However, as described above, by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player tries to make the V winning opening 1156 accept the game ball T by the driving operation, so that the V winning opening 1156 can be noticed and a big hit. Can be clearly understood that was obtained.

Further, an opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the accessory winning opening 1155 determined based on a random number acquired by receiving the game ball T in the second starting port 1153, and the game ball T being accepted in the second starting port 1153. It is possible to adjust whether or not the game ball T is accepted in the accessory winning opening 1155 according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the symbol determined based on the random number acquired by the player. The operation can be changed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

1 Pachinko machine 4 Game board 1100 Game area 1112 Game panel 1120 Table unit 1134 Gate member 1150 Winning port unit 1151 General winning port 1152 First starting port 1153 Second starting port 1154 Large winning port 155 Character winning port (variable entrance)
1156 V winning opening (special entrance)
1220 Character unit 1220A Character prize unit 1220B V prize unit 1221 Character unit opening / closing member 1230 Unit front base 1230c Loss hole (exhaust port)
1232 V winning solenoid 1232a plunger 1233 drive gear member (transmission mechanism)
1233a Shaft part 1233b Extension piece 1233c Drive gear 1233d Engagement part 1234 Driven gear member (transmission mechanism)
1234a Driven gear 1236 Rotating body 1236a Receiving part 1238 Ball guiding member 1238a Peripheral wall part 1238b Upper opening (accommodation opening)
1238c Right mouth (discharge port)
1238d Ball entrance 1238e Upper guidance part 1238f Right guidance part T Game ball

Claims (1)

A launching means that can launch a game medium within the gaming area,
Preliminary judgment means for drawing lots for games when the conditions for starting fluctuations are met,
When it is determined by the lottery of the pre-determination means that it is a special result that can give a profit, the opening / closing member is opened based on the fact that the fluctuation performed by the fluctuation display unit provided outside the effect display device is stopped. An opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the opening / closing member so that the game medium can enter the specific winning opening where the game medium can enter.
The acceptance movable for a predetermined period so that the game medium can pass through a specific area which is provided at a position where the game medium that has entered the specific winning opening can pass and the game medium is restricted from passing by the accepting movable member. Movable member control means that controls the movement of members,
When the game medium can pass through the specific area by moving the receiving movable member for the predetermined period, the advantageous profit giving means for giving a profit different from the profit given by the special result, and
High game wherein as triggered by the advantageous benefit from special result determined as the advantageous benefit imparting means is applied, the game medium to the particular winning hole than gaming normal conditions are controlled with high gaming state and easy entry State control means and
A notification means capable of notifying by a display effect on the effect display device that the result of the lottery by the pre-determination means is the special result that allows the game medium to enter the specific winning opening.
By moving the acceptable movable member for a predetermined period so that the game medium that has entered the specific winning opening can pass through the specific area whose passage is restricted by the acceptable movable member, the specific area is more specific than the normal gaming state. A high game notification means that makes it possible for the player to recognize that the game medium is controlled to a game state in which it is easy to enter the winning opening by executing a specific display effect different from the notification means on the effect display device.
With
In the specific display effect by the high game notification means, the receiving movable member is movable for a predetermined period so that the game medium can pass through the specific area, so that the game medium is moved to the specific winning opening more than the normal game state. Is controlled to a game state in which it is easy to enter before the fluctuation performed by the fluctuation display unit provided outside the effect display device is stopped, and by the notification means by the pre-determination means. It is executed before the display effect notifies that the result of the lottery is the special result that allows the game medium to enter the specific winning opening.
The effect executed in the specific display effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the effect image displayed in the display area to the specific display mode.
In the game state after the jackpot satisfying the predetermined condition is completed , the specific display effect can be executed by the high game notification means .
The specific display effect is a period until the variation of the decorative symbol started by the effect display device is completed in response to the start of the variation performed by the variation display unit provided outside the effect display device. Among them, a gaming machine characterized in that the specific display effect is executed only for a temporary period so that the player can recognize that the specific display effect is being executed .